Chilton's Honda Civic & CR-V 2001-2004 Repair Manual 1563925478, 9781563925474

Citation preview

30203

civic & cr-v HONDA *rM \mr^%

onm.nd REPAIR pfdaip Mi ma 2001-04

I I

Covers

and Canadian models of Honda Civic and CR-V

all

U.S.

i

*

*76e *?c*dt Stefr *)* IZefuiOi

\

Tf

:

ALLEN CQ'JN lllllll

HONDA Covers

fill

II

CIVIC

I ill III

1

&CKV

2001-2004 REPAIR MANUAL

and Canadian models of Honda Civic and CR-V

all

U.S.

by Robert Maddox

Automotive

Books PUBLISHED BY HAYNES NORTH AMERICA.

Inc.

/U/TCMCT1VE BVI'TS

Si

AccHSsaas MEMBER ASSOCIATION figg

Manufactured

in

©2005 Haynes ISBN

1

USA

North America,

Inc.

56392 547 8

Library of

Congress Catalog Card No. 2004114657

Haynes Publishing Group Sparkford Nr Yeovil

Somerset BA22 7JJ England

Haynes North America,

Inc

861 Lawrence Drive

ABCDE FGHU

Newbury Park 91320 USA

KLMNO PQRST

California

Chilton

is

a registered trademark of W.G. Nichols,

Inc.,

and has been licensed

to

Haynes North America,

Inc.

Contents About

this

manual -0-5

-

Introduction

0-5

Conversion factors

Vehicle identification numbers

INTRODUCTORY PAGES .

Buying parts

-

Booster battery (jump) starting

0-6

working

equivalents

facilities

Jacking and towing

-

0-7

-0-15

-0-17

Fraction/decimal/millimeter

0-7

Maintenance techniques, tools and

- 0-16

-0-18

Automotive chemicals and lubricants Safety

first!

-0-20

Troubleshooting

TUNE-UP AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE -

-

0-21

1-1

SINGLE OVERHEAD CAMSHAFT (SOHC) ENGINES - 2A-1 DOUBLE OVERHEAD CAMSHAFT (DOHC) ENGINES - 2B-1

GENERAL ENGINE OVERHAUL PROCEDURES -

2C-1

COOLING, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS -

FUEL AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS -

4-1

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -

5-1

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS -

6-1

3-1

-

0-19

MANUAL TRANSAXLE -

7A-1

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLES - 7B-1

CLUTCH AND DRIVELINE -

BRAKES -

8-1

9-1

SUSPENSION AND STEERING SYSTEMS -

10-1

BODY -11-1

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - 12-1

WIRING DIAGRAMS -12-30

GLOSSARY -

GLOSSARY

GL-1

MASTER INDEX -

IND-1

MASTER INDEX

Photographer and mechanic with a 2003 Honda Civic

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Wiring diagrams provided exclusively for Haynes North America, this project include

All rights reserved.

No

part of this

While every attempt

05-384

damage

by Valley Forge Technical Information Systems. Technical writers

book may be reproduced or transmitted

photocopying, recording or by any information storage or

for loss,

Inc.

who

contributed to

Mike Stubblefield and John Wegmann.

is

made

to

retrieval

ensure that the information

or injury caused by any errors

in,

in

any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including

system, without permission

in this

manual

is

correct,

no

in

writing from the copyright holder.

liability

or omissions from, the information given.

can be accepted by the authors or publishers

INTRODUCTION

About

manual

this

numbered Sections. Each Section consists

PURPOSE

ITS

0-5

of

consecutively numbered

paragraphs.

The purpose your vehicle.

It

manual

of this

can do so

work must be done, even

if

is

to help

you choose

vice department or a repair shop;

to

It

can help you decide what

have

it

repair procedures to follow

We

hope you

simpler jobs, doing

appointment leave

it

to tackle the

it

up.

More

offers diagnostic

work

and accomplishment

that

An added you

procedures

to the

in illustration

be referred to

Section.

The

ref-

captions pinpoint the pertinent

Section and the Step within that Section. That

and Step

the illustration refers to Section 3

will

in that

(or

is,

means

illustration 3.2

paragraph) 2 within that

Procedures, once described it's

necessary

to refer to

in

the text, are not normally repeated.

another Chapter, the reference

be

will

given as Chapter and Section number. Cross references given without

money can be saved

use of the word "Chapter" apply to Sections and/or paragraphs

same

its

benefit is the sense of satisfaction

feel after

which apply

erence numbers used

When

trips to

by avoiding the expense the shop must pass on to you to cover labor and overhead costs.

illustrations

Section.

quicker than arranging an

importantly, a lot of

any

many

yourself. For

shop and making the

to get the vehicle into a

and pick

it

trouble occurs.

may be

yourself

it

when

manual

use the

a dealer ser-

provides information and proce-

it

dures for routine maintenance and servicing; and

and

done by

numbered Section you

At the beginning of each

you get the best value from

several ways.

in

Chapter. For example, "see Section 8"

in

the

in

the

same Chap-

ter.

References to the

doing the job yourself.

means

left

or right side of the vehicle

assume you

are

sitting in the driver's seat, facing forward.

USING THE MANUAL

Even though we have prepared

manual with extreme

this

care, nei-

ther the publisher nor the author can accept responsibility for any

The manual

is

divided into Chapters. Each Chapter

is

divided into

errors

in,

or

omissions from, the information given.

~N0TE A Note provides information necessary to properly complete will make the procedure easier to understand.

a procedure or information

which

CAUTION A Caution provides

a special procedure or special steps which

where the Caution assembly being worked on.

the procedure

is

must be taken while completing

found. Not heeding a Caution can result

in

damage

to the

WARNING A Warning provides the procedure

Introduction to the Civic

body

Honda

models are available

door sedan body

styles.

in

a special procedure or special steps

where the Warning

Civic

is

are available in a four-door

SUV

style only.

is

inline four-cylinder

equipped with electronic

The engine drives the ual transaxle, four-speed

front

is

engine used

in

these

fuel injection.

a transfer case, driveshaft, differential and independent driveaxles,

when

the front wheels begin to lose traction.

units, is

used on

steering unit

wheels through either a five-speed man-

automatic transaxle or a Continuously Vari-

able Transaxle (CVT) via independent driveaxles.

models, power

personal injury.

Independent suspension, featuring

The transversely mounted models

in

and CR-V

two-door coupe, hatchback and four-

CR-V models

which must be taken while completing

found. Not heeding a Warning can result

On

4WD CR-V

transmitted to the rear wheels (automatically) through

is

all

four wheels.

mounted behind

The brakes are disc rear,

at

most models.

spring/shock absorber

the engine.

the front and either discs or

with power assist standard.

available on

coil

The power-assisted rack-and-pinion

An

drums

at the

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

is

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS

0-6

Vehicle Identification numbers Modifications are a continuing and unpublicized process

manufacturing. Since spare parts manuals and

lists

in

vehicle

are compiled

on a

numerical basis, the individual vehicle numbers are essential to correctly identify the

component

month and year (GVWR),

of production, the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) and

the certification

statement.

required.

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) The engine

This very important identification number

is

stamped on a

plate

engine (see

serial

number can be found on

the front side of the

illustration).

attached to the dashboard inside the windshield on the driver's side of the vehicle (see illustration).

on the

label located

It

can also be found on the certification

driver's side

the Vehicle Certificate of Title

door post. The VIN also appears on

and Registration.

It

contains information

such as where and when the vehicle was manufactured, the model year

and the body

style.

On the models covered by

this

manual the model year

codes* are:

*

1

2001

2

2002

3

2003

4

2004

The model year code

is

the tenth character in the VIN.

CERTIFICATION LABEL The

certification label is attached to the driver's

illustration).

The

The Vehicle on top

of the

plate contains the

Identification

name

Number

door post (see

of the manufacturer, the

(VIN)

is

located on a plate

dash (visible through the windshield)

The vehicle

certification label is located

on the end

of the

driver's door

The engine number can be found stamped on the side of the

engine block

BUYING PARTS/MAINTENANCE TECHNIQUES

0-7

Buying parts Replacement parts are available from many sources, which gener-

one

ally fall into

of

two categories

ments and independent these parts

is

-

for parts

as follows:

Retail auto parts stores: Good auto parts stores quently needed components which wear out relatively

stock fre-

will

fast,

such as

Warranty information:

parts stores are often very

good places

needed

maintenance such as

for general vehicle

spark plugs,

belts,

touch-up

to

money. Discount auto

of

paint, bulbs, etc.

grease,

source

is

maintenance and

repair that will be referred to throughout this manual. Application of

these techniques better organized

which

will

will

enable the

and capable

home mechanic

to

be more

is

available and,

regardless of the

possible, take the old parts along for positive

if

1/2-13x1

thread pitch and length. For example, a standard

1/2 inch

M1 2

-

1.75

mm

in

diameter, has 13 threads per inch

1.75 x 25 metric bolt (the distance

is

12

mm

in

and

is 1

bolt

inch long.

An

diameter, has a thread pitch of

between threads) and

mm

25

is

long.

The two

and easily confused, but they are not

bolts are nearly identical,

efficient,

of performing the various tasks properly,

ensure that the repair job

-

invalidate the warranty!

facilities

ter,

in

do not

identification.

MAINTENANCE TECHNIQUES There are a number of techniques involved

covered under war-

is still

To be sure of obtaining the correct parts, have engine and chassis

sell

Maintenance techniques, tools and working

-

numbers

filters,

They also usually

the vehicle

If

be sure that any replacement parts purchased

ranty,

buy materials and parts oil,

the best source

is

and not generally available

to the vehicle

elsewhere (such as major engine parts, transmission parts, trim pieces,

clutch components, exhaust systems, brake parts, tune-up parts, etc.

which can save a considerable amount

which are unique

etc.).

These stores often supply new or reconditioned parts on an exchange basis,

home.

Authorized dealer parts department: This

auto parts stores. Our advice concerning

retail

and general accessories, have convenient hours, charge lower

tools

prices and can often be found not far from

authorized dealer parts depart-

inter-

changeable.

thorough and complete.

addition to the differences

In

in

diameter, thread pitch and length,

metric and standard bolts can also be distinguished by examining the

Fasteners

bolt heads.

Fasteners are nuts, bolts, studs and screws used to hold two or

more

mind when work-

parts together. There are a few things to keep in

Almost

ing with fasteners.

all

of

them use a locking device

some

of

threads and

undamaged corners on

Develop the habit

of replacing all

the hex head

fits.

If

a spout-type penetrant,

let

oil it

for a

fluid to

use turpentine

in

removed with a special nut a bolt or stud breaks

removed with a special

may have

to

be chiseled or sawed

off

or

breaker, available at tool stores. off in

tool

an assembly,

commonly

it

such as the repair

Most

numbers

As a

a metric

result,

a

most standard

bolt. Also,

which

is

an indication of the amount of

The greater the number

it.

of slashes, the

commonly used

through 5 are

into their

heads

to indicate bolt strength. In

number, the stronger the

bolt.

Property class

and 10.9 are commonly used on automobiles.

Many

side, while metric nuts are

standard nuts have dots stamped into one

marked with a number. The greater the num-

Metric studs are also marked on their ends according to property class (grade). Larger studs are

washers and lockwashers, when removed from an assembly,

should always be replaced exactly as removed. Replace any damaged

It

should be noted

that

many

(the

same as

fasteners, especially

have no distinguishing marks on them.

only way to determine whether the thread pitch or

metric bolts),

compare

it

it

Grades is

standard or metric

is

to a

When such

known

is to

fastener of the

through

the case, the

measure

same

size.

Standard fasteners are often referred to as SAE, as opposed to met-

soft metal sur-

face (such as aluminum), thin sheet metal or plastic.

numbered

while smaller studs carry a geometric code to denote grade.

2,

washers with new ones. Never use a lockwasher on any

8.8, 9.8

from metric hex nuts.

have been

stripped out. Flat

true for nuts).

ber of dots, or the higher the number, the greater the strength of the nut.

available for this purpose.

of threaded holes that

molded

this case, the higher the

can be drilled and

automotive machine shops can perform this task, as well as other repair procedures,

is

on a standard

flats

same dimension on

Strength markings can also be used to distinguish standard hex nuts

few minutes before trying to loosen the nut

or bolt. Badly rusted fasteners

If

Some mechanics

same

the grade or strength of the bolt,

can, which works quite well. After applying the rust

work

sized in millimeters (the

rather than a slash,

ease removal and prevent breakage.

inches, while the

on automobiles. Metric bolts have a property class (grade) number,

new ones.

Rusted nuts and bolts should be treated with a penetrating

in

greater the strength of the bolt. Grades

they are removed, they lose their locking ability and must be

replaced with

measured

torque that can be applied to

ones. Special locknuts with nylon or fiber inserts can only be used once.

is

To begin with, the distance across the

bolts have slashes radiating out from the center of the head to denote

new

bolts with

bolt

is

wrench should not be used on a standard

undamaged

where the wrench

damaged nuts and

head

standard wrench should not be used on a metric bolt and a metric

type, either a lockwasher, locknut, locking tab or thread adhesive. All

threaded fasteners should be clean and straight, with

bolt

ric.

However,

it

should be noted that SAE technically refers

non-

to a

metric fine thread fastener only. Coarse thread non-metric fasteners are

Fastener sizes

referred to as

For a number of reasons, automobile manufacturers are making

wider and wider use of metric fasteners. Therefore, able to

tell

the difference between standard

it

is

important to be

(sometimes called U.S. or

SAE) and metric hardware, since they cannot be interchanged. All bolts,

whether standard or metric, are sized according

to

USS

sizes.

Since fasteners of the same size (both standard and metric)

have different strength ratings, be sure nuts removed from your vehicle replacing a fastener with a

diame-

new

to reinstall

in their original

one,

make sure

any

bolts,

may

studs or

locations. Also,

that the

strength rating equal to or greater than the original.

when

new one has

a

MAINTENANCE TECHNIQUES, TOOLS AND WORKING

0-8

if

"% Grade

Refer to illustrations 8.5a, 8.5b

and 8.7

Chapter

** WARNING:

5,

Section

1).

3

Raise the vehicle and place

4

If

the fuel tank

is

siphon the remaining

Gasoline is extremely flammable, so take extra precautions when you work on any part of the fuel system. See the Warning in Section 2.

unit (see Section 5)

1

Relieve the fuel system pressure (see Section 2).

2

Disconnect the cable trom the negative battery terminal (see

from the tank. But

if

it's

not necessary to

there

is

and siphoning

it

a

lot of fuel in

gauge sending

out through the hole for the

unit.

WARNING:

the fuel tank

siphoning action with your mouth!

fuel

the tank, drain the fuel by removing the fuel pump/fuel

pump/sending

•Note: The following procedure is much easier to perform if is empty. The tank has no drain plug, so the fuel must be siphoned from the tank with a siphoning kit, which is available at most auto parts stores. NEVER try to start the

securely on jackstands.

it

empty or nearly empty,

Always siphon

fuel into an approved gasoline container. Also, never start the siphoning action by mouth - use a siphoning pump (available at most auto parts stores).

5

Remove

the fuel

remove the

nect and

filler

neck cover (see

then discon-

illustration),

neck hose and the

fuel filler

fuel tank

vapor hose

(see illustration). Inspect these two hoses for cracks, tears and other deterioration.

6

either

If

Support the

hose

is

damaged

fuel tank with a

or worn, replace

transmission jack.

a transmission jack, use a floor jack.

If

If

it.

you don't have

you're going to use a floor jack,

put a piece of plywood between the jack head and the fuel tank to protect the tank.

7

Unbolt the

fuel tank retaining straps (see illustration)

and remove

them.

8

Carefully lower the fuel tank.

9

If

you need

to

remove the

module, but haven't yet done so, going

10

have the

to

fuel

1

filler

neck cover, remove these

Installation is the reverse of removal.

Fuel tank cleaning and repair The

1

are

made

removed

fuel tanks installed in the vehicles

of plastic

repairable.

for cleaning, this is a job that

who has experience Even

and are not

after

in this critical

If

-

If

you're

in this

Be sure

to tighten the fuel

Chapter's Specifications.

you're done, reconnect the cable to the negative battery

PCM

idle learn

procedure (see Chapter

5,

then start the engine and check for fuel leaks.

remove the

fuel tank strap bolts (rear

shown,

front similar)

general information

covered by this manual the fuel tank has been

should be

1),

6.

8.7 To detach the fuel tank from the underside of the vehicle,

8.5b To disconnect the fuel filler neck hose and the fuel tank vapor hose, loosen these hose clamps and pull off both hoses

9

When

terminal and perform the

Section

four fasteners

Sections 5 and

fuel tank cleaned, refer to Section 9.

tank strap bolts to the torque listed

8.5a To detach the fuel

pump/fuel gauge sending unit

refer to

left

to

a professional

and potentially dangerous work.

cleaning and flushing of the fuel tank, explosive fumes

can remain. 2 placed

If

the fuel tank

in

is

removed from the

vehicle,

it

should not be

an area where sparks or open flames could

coming out

of the tank.

gas-type appliance

is

ignite the

fumes

Be especially careful inside garages where a

located,

because

it

could cause an explosion.

FUEL AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 10 Air

housing

filter

-

4-13

removal and installation

COUPE AND SEDAN Air intake duct/resonator »

Refer to illustrations 10.2 and 10.4 Disengage the accelerator cable and cruise control cable from

1

the cable guide at the right rear corner of the valve cover, disengage the

accelerator cable from the guide at the right rear corner of the engine

compartment (next

to the cruise control actuator), then set both cables

aside.

2

Detach the fresh

illustration). air intake

but you

air inlet

(You don't have

duct/resonator

in

to

duct from the

is

easier to

way.) Clearly label

air inlet

duct from the

order to remove the intake duct/resonator,

do have detach the harness from the

duct/resonator

intake/resonator (see

air

detach the fresh

remove

if

inlet

duct and the intake

the fresh air inlet duct

is

out of the

cables and hoses (see illustration) that are

all

duct/resonator, detach the harness guide (1) from the top of

attached or connected to the air intake duct, then detach or disconnect

them and 3

set

them

aside.

Detach the harness from the bracket

Remove

tration)

5

the inlet duct by pulling

mounting at the

lower

left

rear corner

of the air intake duct/resonator.

4

10.2 To detach the fresh air inlet duct from the air intake

in

mounting bolts (see

illus-

straight up,

remove the duct grommet

the right fender, then pull off the duct to the right (toward

the fender);

the air intake duct/resonator

it

bolt (2), pull the locator pin (3) out of its

if

the pleated rubber boot (4) doesn't

with the duct, remove

it

now

come

off

also

and remove the intake duct/resonator.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

Air filter housing I Refer to illustrations 10.7, 10.8, 10.9a


:

of

fuel injector is a solenoid-actuated, pintle-type

running, there

nozzle.

fuel

and acoustic "noise" produced by the

bolted to the intake

is

inserted into the intake manifold).

is

ground paths on and

into

13 Programmed Fuel Injection (PGM-FI) system t Refer to illustrations

each injector

minal.

sys-

pumped through a

rail, it's

of

is

tem).

Right before the fuel reaches the fuel

end

houses the upper end

ing of a solenoid, plunger, needle valve

the operating pressure

fuel is

fuel rail also

Each

-

fuel pres-

fuel "return" line in this

which

fuel rail,

fuel available for acceleration

The

into the

pressure regulator

which maintains the

sure within the specified operating range.

always enough

out the other end of

the supply line to the fuel

The

operating.

it's

manifold, functions as a reservoir for pressurized fuel so that there's

After the pressurized fuel

line leads to a fuel

pump assembly

drawn through a

is

pumped

filter.

pumped through

it's

the engine compartment. Another

supply

then

inlet,

through an integral

pump when

can be removed from the

top of the fuel tank without removing the tank. Fuel

4-17

of all

some

false

air,

but

if

it's

engine

A

loose or broken

air" into the intake

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor and the sate for

mixture

vacuum hoses connected

to the throttle body.

allow "false (unmetered)

air/fuel

lean, the

will

to

vacuum

manifold. The

PCM

can compen-

excessive, especially at idle and during

other high-intake-manifold-vacuum conditions, the engine will misfire.

Remove

-Note: The following procedure is based on the assumption that the fuel pump is working and the fuel pressure is adequate

dirt,

(see Section 3).

around the

1

Check

electrical

all

connectors that are related

Check the ground wire connections

for tightness.

and poor grounds can cause many problems

that

to the

Loose connectors resemble more seri-

is fully

injectors are output actuators)

charged. The Powertrain Control

Inspect the air

4 find a

filter will

5

filter

in

all

blown

fuse, replace

Check

element (see Chapter

1).

A

dirty or partially

fuses related to the fuel system (see Chapter 12).

ground

it

in

and see

if

it

blows again.

If

it

If

you

does, look for

the circuit(s) protected by that fuse.

the air induction system between the throttle

7

dirty,

to listen to

each

injector;

body and the

it

for

clean

it

with carb cleaner, a tooth-

With the engine running, place an automotive stethoscope

touch the

tip of

you don't have a stethoscope,

If

a long screwdriver against each injector and listen

8

If

you can hear the injectors operating, but the engine

should

a clicking sound that rises and falls with engine speed

is

misfir-

ing,

then the electrical circuits are functioning correctly, but the injec-

tors

might be

dirty or at

clogged. Try a commercial injector cleaning

auto parts stores).

help, the injectors probably

9

If

an injector

connect the injector

is

need

to

not operating

electrical

If

cleaning the injectors doesn't

be replaced. (it

makes no

clicking sound), dis-

connector and measure the resistance

across the injector terminals with an ohmmeter (see

13.9 13.7 Use a stethoscope

make

it's

body and look

the throttle body, particularly

against each injector, one at a time, and listen for a clicking sound that

product (available

severely impede performance and economy.

Check

a wire shorted to

If

in

through the handle.

(the fuel

depend on a stable voltage supply

order to meter fuel correctly.

blocked

throttle plate.

indicates operation (see illustration).

Verify that the battery

Module (PCM), information sensors and output actuators

3

the air intake duct from the throttle

carbon, varnish, or other residue

brush and a clean shop towel.

system.

ous malfunctions. 2

6

If

an injector

sound), use an

isn't

the two injector terminals

to

Com-

(it's not making a clicking measure the resistance across

working

ohmmeter

illustration).

4-18

FUEL AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

pare your measurement with the resistance value listed Specifications. Replace

any

injector

whose

in this

Chapter's

resistance value does not

within the specifications.

fall

14 Throttle body

-

10

If

injector

might be

engine

is

completely cool before beginning this

procedure.

PCM

is

and the

Disconnect the

connectors from the

electrical

Idle Air

Control

(IAC) valve, the Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) canister purge valve and the Throttle Position (TP) sensor (see illustration).

Clamp

3

COUPE AND SEDAN

off

the two coolant bypass hoses to the throttle

body (see

little

coolant

Disconnect the vacuum hoses from the EVAP canister purge

4

valve (see illustration 14.2).

and 14.9

5 the air intake duct/resonator

disconnect them. Be prepared for a

spillage.

I Refer to illustrations 14.2, 14.6, 14.7

Remove

or the circuit between the

faulty.

illustration 14.2), then

1

PCM

Section 10).

2 until the

not operating, but the resistance reading

is

removal and installation

** WARNING: Wait

the injector

within specifications, the

and the

filter

housing (see

Disconnect the cruise control cable from the

Disconnecting the cruise control cable from the the

same procedure as disconnecting

trations 11.2

cam.

cam

is

the accelerator cable (see illus-

and 11.3).

Remove

6

throttle lever

throttle lever

the three throttle

body mounting

bolts

and the mounting

nut (see illustration) and remove the throttle body.

Remove

7 card

the old throttle

body gasket (see

illustration)

and dis-

it.

8

Remove

all

traces of old gasket material from the throttle

body

and the intake manifold. 9 unit),

Before installing the old throttle body

(if

spray the bore with carburetor cleaner or

you're installing the old

some

other suitable

solvent and thoroughly clean the bore, particularly the area below the throttle valve,

by wiping

off

the oily residue, varnish and/or carbon

deposits with a clean shop rag (see illustration).

#* 14.2 Throttle body removal (coupe and sedan): 1

CAUTION:

Unless the throttle body that you're cleaning is stripped of all components such as the Throttle Position (TP) sensor, EVAP canister purge valve and MAP sensor attached, make sure that you don't spray any of these devices with carb cleaner. Solvent will damage the plastic housings for these units and might even damage the delicate electronics inside them. external

Disconnect the electrical connector from the Idle Air Control

A C)

(I

valve

2

Disconnect the electrical connector from the Evaporative Emissions

3

Disconnect the electrical connector from the Throttle Position (IP)

(EVAP) canister purge valve

sensor

10

4

Disconnect the coolant bypass hoses from the

5

Disconnect the vacuum hoses from the

throttle

Installation is the reverse of removal.

Be sure

to

use new gaskets

body

EVAP canister purge

valve

14.7 After removing the throttle body from the intake manifold, remove and discard the old gasket; always use a

14.6 To detach the throttle body from the intake manifold of a coupe or sedan,

remove these fasteners

new gasket when air leaks

installing the throttle

body

to prevent

FUEL AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS and tighten the in this

body mounting

bolts

and nut

to the torque listed

Chapter's Specifications.

When

11

throttle

4-19

you're done, check the coolant level and top

sary (see Chapter

up

it

if

neces-

1).

12 Check the accelerator cable adjustment and adjust

it

if

necessary

(see Section 11).

13 Perform the

PCM

idle learn

14 Start the engine and check

procedure (see Chapter for air

and coolant

5,

Section

1).

leaks.

CR-V AND HATCHBACK 15 On CR-Vs, remove the

throttle linkage cover.

16 Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the

air intake

duct from

the throttle body.

17 Disconnect the

connectors from the Evaporative Emis-

electrical

sion (EVAP) canister purge valve, the Manifold Absolute Pressure

(MAP) sensor, the

Throttle Position (TP) sensor

and the

14.9 To clean the bore of the throttle body, spray

Idle Air Control

(IAC) valve.

carburetor cleaner or

with

(shown) with a clean shop rag. Make sure that you remove

valve and from the throttle body.

19 Clamp

off

any

little

carbon deposits

coolant spillage.

24 20 Disconnect the accelerator cable and, cable from the throttle lever

cam

if

the four throttle

Be sure

Installation is the reverse of removal.

to

use new gaskets

equipped, the cruise con-

and tighten the

body mounting

throttle

bolts

and nut

to the torque listed

(see Section 11). in this

Remove

oily residue, varnish and/or

the two coolant bypass hoses to the throttle body, then

disconnect them. Be prepared for a

21

it

other suitable solvent and wipe

out the bore, particularly the area below the throttle valve

18 Disconnect the vacuum hoses from the EVAP canister purge

trol

some

body mounting

bolts

(CR-V) or two

Chapter's Specifications.

25 When you're done, check the coolant

level

and top

it

up

it

if

mounting bolts and two mounting nuts (hatchback) and remove the sary (see Chapter

if

neces-

1).

throttle body.

22 Remove the old

26 Check the accelerator cable adjustment and adjust throttle

body gasket and discard

(see Section 11).

23 Remove

all

traces of old gasket material from the throttle

body

27 Perform

the

and the intake manifold.

28

15 Fuel pulsation damper

-

The

fuel pulsation

rail

PCM

procedure (see Chapter

idle learn

engine and check

for air

and coolant

5,

Section

1).

leaks.

HATCHBACK

damper

is

an integral part of the

fuel rail.

not available separately. To replace the fuel pulsation damper, you

replace the fuel

Start the

removal and installation

COUPE AND SEDAN 1

necessary

it.

It

10 Relieve the system

is

must

fuel

pressure (see Section

2),

then disconnect

the cable from the negative battery terminal (see Chapter 5, Section 1).

(see Section 16).

11

Remove

the engine cover (see Chapter 2B).

12 Locate the

CR-V

fuel pulsation

13 Remove the

damper on

the front of the fuel

mounting nuts (see Section

fuel rail

rail.

16).

14 Disconnect the ground cable. 2

Relieve the system fuel pressure (see Section 2), then disconnect

15 Raise the

the cable from the negative battery terminal (see Chapter 5, Section 1).

3

Locate the fuel pulsation damper

4

Disconnect the quick-connect

end

at the left

fitting

of the fuel

rail.

(see Section 4) that con-

Using a back-up wrench on the big hex

to protect the fuel rail

at the

Remove and

7

Installation is the reverse of removal.

discard the old pulsation

installing the pulsation

of the fuel

to

8

Reconnect the cable

9

PCM

When

idle learn

use a new

sation

5,

installing the pulsation

Section

then per1).

dampSr

new

damper, make sure that the drain

PCM

is

otherwise the reverse of

sealing washers and tighten the fuel pul-

securely.

19 Reconnect the cable the

to the negative battery terminal,

procedure (see Chapter

When

removal. Be sure to use

damper, then tighten the damper

you're done, start the engine and check for leaks around

the pulsation damper.

18

hole on the damper faces down. Installation

to the torque listed in this Chapter's Specifications.

form the

loosen the fuel pulsation damper with another

17 Remove and discard the old pulsation damper sealing washers.

rail

damper sealing washer. Be sure

slightly.

tion block.

end

another wrench, then unscrew and remove the damper.

washer when

to protect the fuel rail,

from damage, loosen the pulsation damper with

6

assembly

wrench. Then unscrew and remove the pulsation damper from the junc-

nects the fuel supply line to the fuel pulsation damper.

5

fuel rail

16 Using a back-up wrench on the pulsation damper junction block

idle learn

20 When you're done, the fuel pulsation

to the negative battery cable, then

procedure (see Chapter

damper

start the

5,

Section

perform

1).

engine and check the area around

for leaks.

FUEL AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

4-20 16 Fuel

rail

and injectors

-

removal and installation

COUPE AND SEDAN I Refer to illustrations 16.3, 16.5, 16.7, 16.8, 16.9a, 16.9b

and 16.10

** WARNING: Gasoline

is

extremely flammable, so take extra precautions part of the fuel system. See the Warning

when you work on any Section 2.

in

1

Relieve the system tuel pressure (see Section 2), then disconnect

the cable from the negative battery terminal (see Chapter 5, Section 1).

2

Remove

the air intake duct/resonator and

filter

housing (see Sec-

tion 10).

16.3 Disconnect the electrical connectors from the four

3

Disconnect the

electrical

connectors from the

electrical

connectors from the Evaporative Emis-

fuel injectors (see

illustration).

fuel injectors

4

Disconnect the

sions (EVAP) canister purge valve and the Throttle Position (TP) sensor (see illustration 14.2) and disconnect the electrical connector from the Manifold Absolute Pressure

Chapter

5

(MAP) sensor

(see illustration 10.2

in

6).

Disconnect the quick-connect

ply line to the fuel pulsation

fitting that

damper (see

connects the

illustration).

If

fuel

sup-

you're not yet

familiar with the disconnection procedure for this type of fitting, refer to

Section 4 for help.

6

Disconnect the vacuum hoses from both ends of the pipe

welded

to the fuel

7

Remove

the fuel

rail

mounting nuts (see

8

Remove

the fuel

rail

and the

(see illustration).

If

any

bores, carefully pry pulling

up

at the

illustration).

fuel injectors as a single

same

time. After

removing the

pulsation

damper (see Section 4

(2)

the fuel

fitting),

from both ends

rail (left

fitting (1)

from the fuel

you don't know how

9

their

and

for

in

a plastic bag until

reassembly.

To remove each injector from the

fuel rail,

remove the

retainer clip,

to

vacuum vacuum pipe that's welded to vacuum hose not shown in this photo)

disconnect this type of

hoses

if

from

to side

fuel rail/injector

assembly, remove the two spacers and store them

16.5 Disconnect the quick-connect

assembly

of the injectors are difficult to extract

them loose by wiggling them from side

you need them again

that's

(see illustration 16.5).

rail

then disconnect the

of the

16.8

Remove

assembly.

If

the fuel

any

rail

and injectors as a single

of the injectors stick in their bores, carefully

wiggle them from side to side while simultaneously pulling straight up;

16.7 To detach the fuel

rail

from the cylinder head, remove

these two nuts (coupe sedan shown, others similar)

between the the fuel

rail

if

that doesn't work, insert a large pry bar

fuel rail

upward

and the valve cover and carefully lever any stuck injectors

to free

FUEL AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

4-21

16.10 Be sure to remove both of the old injector 0-rings and discard

16.9a To detach an injector from the

16.9b

fuel rail, pull off the retainer clip with

.

.

.

then carefully work the

injector out of

a pair of pliers

its

bore

bore

its

in

the fuel

them and

injector (see illustration), discard

each new 0-ring with clean engine

on the if

oil

to

you only removed the fuel

O-rings, cushion rings 11 insert

and seal rings

assembly to a good idea to and replace all the

same

at the

corresponding bore

its

it

into that injector's

13 Once the seated

in their

tighten

them

fuel rail

bore

time.

the fuel

in

assembly

you're

dure (see Chapter

and

place, with

mounting nuts and

done reassembling everything, reconnect the cable then perform the

5,

Section

pressure

in

PCM

store

to

ON

to activate the fuel

the fuel lines and the fuel

rail,

but

and

pump and

build

verify that the injectors are

working and there are no

start the

engine and

them

in

nuts.

them again

a plastic bag until you need injectors from the fuel

rail,

injector 0-ring with clean

it

into that injector's

25 Once the seated

in their

tighten

them

fuel rail

corresponding bore

assembly

place

is in

for reassembly.

remove and discard the

24 Coat each new lower press

the fuel

in

After

assembly, remove the two spacers and

injector

engine

reinstall

oil

and

the intake manifold.

in

four injectors are fully

(all

respective bores), install the fuel

and

mounting nuts and

rail

to the torque listed in this Chapter's Specifications. (Don't

forget to install the spacers

26 Once the seated

in their

tighten

them

fuel rail

first!)

assembly

place, with

is in

respective bores, install the fuel

to the

torque listed

27 The remainder

in this

four injectors fully

all

rail

mounting nuts and

Chapter's Specifications.

of installation is the reverse of removal.

28 When you're done reassembling everything, reconnect the cable

dure (see Chapter

29 Turn the fuel

5,

Section

ignition switch to

pressure

in

perform the

PCM

idle learn

proce-

1).

ON

to activate the fuel

the fuel lines and the fuel

rail,

but

pump and

build

DON'T operate

the starter yet. Repeat this step two or three times, then check the fuel

pressure (see Section

2),

then disconnect

the cable from the negative battery terminal (see Chapter 5, Section 1).

17 Exhaust system servicing I Refer to illustrations 17.1

fuel

(hatch-

and injectors as a single assembly.

fuel rail/injector

lines, fuel rails fuel

mounting

rail

fuel rail

new 0-rings on each

up

18 Relieve the system

from the

rail

disconnect this type

to

(see Steps 9 through 11).

fuel leaks.

CR-V AND HATCHBACK

fitting

of the fuel

you don't know how

if

to the negative battery terminal, then

17 Once you're confident that there are no leaks,

end

left

rail

fuel

injectors for fuel leaks.

quick-connect

line

or from the

old injector 0-rings, install

DON'T operate check the

fuel injectors, dis-

the injectors

proce-

1).

the starter yet. Repeat this step two or three times, then lines, fuel rails

idle learn

4

the fuel

22 Remove the

four injectors fully

all

rail

of installation is the reverse of removal.

16 Turn the ignition switch fuel

is in

Remove

21

23 Remove the

first!)

to the negative battery terminal,

up

then

supply

fuel

back). Refer to Section

rail.

oil

connectors from the

of fitting.

to the torque listed in this Chapter's Specifications. (Don't

14 The remainder

When

oil,

electrical

damper (CR-V)

removing the

the intake manifold.

respective bores, install the fuel

forget to install the spacers

15

in

pulsation

it's

Coat the new upper injector 0-rings with clean engine each injector into

injector.

rail

rail

20 Disconnect the

0-rings. Coat

12 Coat each new lower injector 0-ring with clean engine press

installing an injector

connect the ground cable and remove the harness holder.

easier to slide the 0-

it

Repeat this procedure for each

injector.

the injectors from the fuel

all of

new

install

make

replace a single injector or a leaking 0-ring,

remove

rail

19 Disconnect the

(see illustrations).

rail

10 Remove and discard the upper and lower 0-rings from each

—Note: Even

the fuel

.

.

then pull the injector out of

ring into place

in

them. Always use new 0-rings when

-

and

injectors for fuel leaks.

30 Once you're confident verify that the injectors are

that there are

no

leaks, start the

working and there are no

engine and

fuel leaks.

general information under the vehicle, make sure

and 17.4

it

is

securely supported on jack-

stands.

WARNING: 1

Inspect and repair exhaust system

components only

after

enough time has elapsed after driving the vehicle to allow the system components to cool completely. Also, when working

The exhaust system consists

of the exhaust manifolds, the cat-

alytic converter, the muffler, the tailpipe

and

flanges and clamps. The exhaust system

is

all

connecting pipes,

isolated from the vehicle

body and from chassis components by a series

of rubber

hangers (see

FUEL AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

4-22

illustration). Periodically inspect

these hangers for cracks or other

4

signs ot deterioration, replacing them as necessary.

Conduct regular inspections

2

and

quiet.

Look

for

exhaust system to keep

of the

any damaged or bent

parts,

it

safe

a)

open seams, holes,

Do

If

the exhaust system

components

c)

are extremely corroded, or

shop remove the corroded sections with a

repair

want outfit

saw.

at this point is to

to

save

money by doing

and cutting If

it

yourself, but

air,

d)

If

you

e)

If

you decide

components with a hack-

there are special pneumatic cutting

to tackle the job at

home, be sure

to

the back to the front

when removing exhaust system

make them

component

fasteners

easier to remove.

Use new gaskets, hangers and clamps when Apply anti-seize compound

Be sure

installing

to the threads of all

to allow sufficient clearance

and all points on

parts

chisels (available from specialty tool manufacturers) that can also be

used.

repairing the

exhaust

exhaust system

fasteners during reassembly.

you don't have a welding

torch, simply cut off the old

you have compressed

when

systems components.

have a muffler

cutting torch.

Work from

(see illustration) to

rusted together, you'll need welding equipment and a cutting torch to

remove them. The convenient strategy

guidelines to follow

b) Apply penetrating oil to the exhaust system

not repair deteriorated

exhaust system components; replace them with new parts.

3

some simple

components.

loose connections, excessive corrosion or other defects which could allow exhaust fumes to enter the vehicle.

Here are

exhaust system:

between newly installed

the underbody to avoid overheating the

floor

pan and possibly damaging the

tion.

Pay particularly close

interior carpet

and

insula-

attention to the catalytic converter

and

heat shield.

wear safety

goggles to protect your eyes from metal chips and wear work gloves to protect your hands.

17.4 Exhaust pipe tlange bolts and nuts can be extremely difficult to

loosen because they've been subjected to extreme

heat for prolonged periods of time. The best 17.1

Inspect the rubber hangers that support the exhaust

these fasteners

system every time that you are working underneath the vehicle

give

it

is to

plenty of time to loosen

Specifications 3/8 to 1/2-inch (10 to 12

Accelerator cable deflection

mm)

Fuel system pressure

Coupe and sedan

40

to

47

psi

CR-V

48

to

55

psi

Hatchback

47

to

52

psi

10

to

13 ohms

Injector resistance

Torque specifications Throttle

Fuel

rail

body mounting bolts/nuts

Ft-lbs (unless otherwise indicated)

(all

models)

192

in-lbs

Nm 22

mounting nuts

Coupe and sedan

104.4 in-lbs

12

CR-V and hatchback

192

in-lbs

22

192

in-lbs

22

Fuel pulsation

CR-V

damper

way

to

loosen

apply a liberal dose of penetrant to them,

them

up, then unscrew

them

Section 1

General information, precautions and battery disconnection

2

Battery

-

emergency jump

3

Battery

-

check and replacement

4

Battery cables

5

Ignition

system

-

general information

6

Ignition

system

-

check

7

Ignition coils - replacement

8

Charging system

-

general information and precautions

9

Charging system

-

check

10

Alternator

11

Starting system - general information

-

check and replacement

-

removal and installation

12

Starter

motor and

13

Starter

motor

Reference

-

light

circuit -

and precautions

check

removal and installation

to other

CHECK ENGINE

starting

Chapters on

-

See Chapter 6

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

5-2

General information, precautions and battery disconnection

1

The engine

electrical

systems include

components

body

are covered separately from

as the lights, the instruments,

ignition,

all

charging and

** WARNING!

of their engine-related tunctions, these

components. Because

starting

etc.

(which

electrical

you'll find in

Some memory

savers deliver a considerable amount of current order to keep vehicle systems operational after the main battery is disconnected. If you're using a memory saver, make sure that the circuit concerned is actually open before servicing

devices such

in

Chapter 12).

PRECAUTIONS

it.

Always observe the following precautions when working on the electrical

a)

** WARNING

system:

Be extremely

careful

when servicing engine

nents. They are easily

b)

damaged

electrical

compo-

If

checked, connected or handled

if

you're going to work near any of the airbag system compo-

nents, the battery

MUST

be disconnected and a memory saver memory saver is used, power will be which means that it could accidentally

improperly.

must NOT be used.

Never leave the ignition switched on for long periods of time

supplied to the airbag, deploy and cause serious personal injury.

when

the engine is not running.

c)

Never disconnect the battery cables while the engine

d)

Maintain correct polarity when connecting battery cables from

another vehicle during jump starting

-

is

If

a

running.

To disconnect the battery for service procedures requiring power to

see the "Booster battery

be cut from the vehicle, loosen the cable clamp nut and disconnect the

(jump) starting" Section at the front of this manual.

cable from the negative battery post. Isolate the cable end to prevent

Always disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal

e)

2:

from coming

it

into accidental contact with the battery post.

before working on the electrical system, but read the following battery disconnection procedure It's

good

also a

first.

idea to review the safety-related information regard-

ing the engine electrical

systems located

the "Safety

in

first!"

Section

at

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) IDLE LEARN PROCEDURE

the front of this manual, before beginning any operation included in

Make

this Chapter.

after

BATTERY DISCONNECTION

sure that the

you do any

PCM

at all

the vehicle require battery

to

be available

the battery

memory

locks, etc.), or to maintain control unit

Module and

tion presets, Powertrain Control

cut.

power

Replace the

times, either to maintain continuous operation (alarm system,

power door

Remove

When

other control units).

throttle

Remove

is

the No. 19 (120-amp)

points to ensure that there are no unforeseen consequences of this

Remove

Remove any

some models

make sure you have

is

When

the battery or

and

any of the components

Module (PCM)

will

lose

some

the

"PCM

idle learn

data from It

is

its

On a

vehicle with

remove it

power door

locks,

the key from the ignition

does not get locked inside

if

it's

and to keep

the

it

to

is

with you, so that

memory

saver

is

plugged

reconnected!

into the cigarette lighter

and

is

electrical

system. The

memory

saver

current to maintain audio unit security codes, will

will

memory,

con-

etc.

and

provide power to "always hot" circuits such as the clock and radio

memory

circuits.

2

3

of

provide sufficient

PCM

and

connector between the engine compartment

electrical

and

the

PCM wire harness

all

electrical

components

window

defogger,

sound system,

that

Start the engine, bring (in

PARK

or

it

up

NEUTRAL),

to

(air

conditioning sys-

etc.) are

3000 rpm and hold

until the radiator fan

it

turned OFF. there, with

comes on

or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194-degrees

some

nected to a spare battery. Then the vehicle battery can be disconnected

from the

1

box

relay

Make sure

no load

these problems. Precise details vary according to the device used. The typical

relay No.

box

tem, lights, rear

power door locks should

engage accidentally when the battery

engine

Disconnect the ground wire from the cylinder head 1

Devices known as "memory-savers" can be used to avoid

(in the

Disconnect the ground wire from the body

after dis-

a wise precaution

BATTERY fuse

Disconnect the battery ground wire from the transmission housing

memory regarding

connecting any of the components listed below. c)

compartment

of the wires from the engine compartment fuse

wire harness

imperative that you perform

procedure" (see procedure below)

PGM-FI main

Disconnect the

listed below, is dis-

management system's Powertrain Control

the engine idle characteristics.

the engine

Disconnect any of the connectors from the engine compartment fuse

the correct anti-theft codes for the radio

connected, the engine

the

relay

equipped with an and -theft system;

before disconnecting the battery. b)

PCM fuse (in

relay box)

compartment fuse and relay box)

action:

The radio in

6 (15 amp)

the No.

and

fuse

So, before you disconnect the battery, please note the following

a)

PCM

body

Replace the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve

(radio sta-

disconnected, the power that maintains these systems

is

procedures:

Disconnect the battery Replace (or reset) the

Some systems on

"learns" the engine idle characteristics

of the following

it

Allow the engine to

and with the

Note:

If

idle for at least five

F.

minutes with no load on

throttle fully closed.

the radiator fan

comes on during

this five-minute

period, don't include the time during which the fan runs as part of the five

minutes.

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS RESETTING THE POWER

WINDOW CONTROL

UNIT 5 the

On

the

CR-V and on

the

2004 hatchback, you must

reset the

power

Fully

open the

AUTO DOWN

driver's

window by holding

position. After the

control unit after you

do any

of the following

the driver's switch

window reaches

procedures:

in

open

its fully

AUTO DOWN

position, hold the driver's switch in the

window

5-3

position for two

seconds.

Disconnect the battery

Remove

6

the No.

(7.5

the under-dash fuse

Disconnect the

4

driver's

the No.

23 (20 amp)

-

fuse from

and relay box

the

AUTO UP

tion,

door wiring harness

Turn the ignition switch to OFF, then turn

Battery

Fully close the driver's

6

amp) and/or

emergency jump

hold the driver's switch

7 it

to

If

the

window by holding

position. After the

window

in

window reaches

the

AUTO UP

doesn't operate

in

the driver's switch its fully

in

closed posi-

position for two seconds.

AUTO,

reset the

power window

control unit by repeating this entire procedure.

ON.

starting

Refer to the Booster battery (jump) starting procedure at the front of this manual.

3

Battery

-

check and replacement —Note: The

** WARNING:

battery's surface charge

must be removed before

accurate voltage measurements can be made. Turn on the high

Always disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal FIRST and hook it up LAST or the battery may be shorted by the tool being used to loosen the cable clamps.

beams

for ten

seconds, then turn them

off

and

let

the vehicle

stand for two minutes. With the engine and

all

accessories

Off,

touch the negative probe of the

voltmeter to the negative terminal of the battery and the positive probe

** CAUTION:

to the positive terminal of the battery.

some models is equipped with an anti-theft syssure you have the correct anti-theft codes for the radio before disconnecting the battery.

The radio tem;

1 1

.5 to

12.5 volts or slightly above.

If

The battery voltage should be the battery

is

less than the speci-

in

make

fied voltage,

charge the battery before proceeding to the next

Do

test.

not proceed with the battery load test unless the battery charge

cor-

is

rect.

3

Perform a battery load

test.

An accurate check

of the battery

dition can only be performed with a load tester (available at

CHECK

con-

most auto

parts stores). This test evaluates the ability of the battery to operate the starter

I Refer to illustrations 3.2 1

and other accessories during periods

up a special load

Disconnect the negative battery cable, then the positive cable

from the 2

and 3.3

test the battery

of high current draw.

tester to the battery terminals (see illustration).

Hook

Load

according to the manufacturer's instructions. This tool

carbon-pile-type variable resistor to increase the load

utilizes a

battery.

Check the

battery state of charge. Visually inspect the indicator

eye on the top of the battery;

demand for

if

charge the battery as described

the indicator eye in

Chapter

1

.

is

black

in

(current draw) on the battery. Maintain the load on the battery

15 seconds or less and observe

that the battery voltage

color

Next perform an open

voltage circuit test using a digital voltmeter (see illustration).

drop below 9.6

volts.

If

the battery condition

is

weak

does not

or defective, the

tool will indicate this condition immediately.

3.2 To test the open circuit voltage of the battery, touch the

3.3

black probe of the voltmeter to the negative terminal and the red probe to the positive terminal of the battery; a fully

with an

charged battery should be about 12.5 volts

switch that puts the battery under a fixed load)

Some

battery load testers (like this one) are equipped

ammeter

that allows

you

to vary the

amount

of the

load on the battery (less expensive testers only have a load

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

5-4

3.8a To remove the battery tray from the engine

compartment, remove these two upper mounting bolts 3.4 Battery mounting details 1

Negative cable clamp (always disconnect this one

up

first,

and hook

it

last)

2

Positive terminal cover

3

Positive cable clamp

4

Hold-down clamp bolt/nut

-Note: Cold temperatures will cause the minimum voltage requirements to drop slightly. Follow the chart given in the manufacturer's instructions to compensate for cold climates.

Minimum

load voltage for freezing temperatures (32-degrees F)

should be approximately 9.1 volts.

REPLACEMENT I Refer to illustrations 3.4, 3.8a

4

and 3.8b

3.8b ... and remove these two mounting bracket bolts from

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal

underneath the tray first,

then

(and only then!) disconnect the cable from the positive battery terminal

8

If

there's corrosion

on the battery

(see illustration). ing bolts (see illustrations)

5

Remove

the battery

hold-down clamp nuts (see

illustration 3.4)

and remove the hold-down clamp. 6

Lift

out the battery. Be careful

4

is

- it's

heavy.

out, inspect the battery tray for corrosion.

Battery cables

-

tray's

mount-

from the engine com-

partment. Clean the deposits from the metal to prevent the battery tray

9

While the battery

tray

from further corrosion.

—Note: Battery straps and handlers are available at most auto parts stores for a reasonable price. They make it easier to remove and carry the battery. 7

remove the

tray,

and remove the

If

you are replacing the

identical, with the

battery,

make sure you

same dimensions, amperage

get one that's

rating, cold

cranking

rating, etc.

10 itive

Installation is the reverse of removal.

cable

first

and the negative cable

last

Be sure

to

(see Section

connect the pos1).

check and replacement

> Refer to illustrations 4.4a, 4.4b, and 4.4c

negative battery terminal

first

and hook

it

up

last,

or

you might acci-

dentally short out the battery with the tool you're using to loosen the 1

Periodically inspect the entire length of each battery cable for

damage, cracked or burned insulation and corrosion. Poor

battery

cable connections can cause starting problems and decreased engine

cable clamps. Even

if

you're only replacing the cable for the positive

terminal, be sure to disconnect the negative cable from the battery

(see Section

first

1).

performance.

2

Inspect the cable-to-terminal connections at the ends of the

cables for cracks, loose wire strands and corrosion. The presence of white, fluffy deposits under the insulation at the cable terminal tion

means

that the cable is

connec-

corroded and should be replaced. Also

inspect the battery posts for distortion and corrosion.

If

they're cor-

roded, clean them up

3

When removing

the cables, always disconnect the cable from the

**

CAUTION:

The radio on some models is equipped with an anti-theft system. Make sure you have the correct anti-theft codes before disconnecting the battery. You'll also want to write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons.

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

4.4a The battery ground cable

is

4.4b One

typically secured to the

4

Disconnect the old cables from the opposite end and disconnect

it

then trace each cable

battery,

cables goes from the battery underhood fuse/relay box (1); the other heavy gauge wire (2) goes to the alternator (coupe/sedan model shown, others similar) of the positive

straight to the

inner fender panel (A) and the transaxle (B)

to its

(see illustrations). Be sure to note 'ft. „...••-••

«

the routing of each cable before disconnecting installation. Starter

cable replacement

the vehicles covered in this

to

it

isn't entirely

manual because the

ensure correct straightforward on

starter cable disap-

down

pears into a thicket of harnesses and emerges from the other end solenoid.

at the starter

old electrical tape,

What you must do

is

carefully

remove

all

^1

new

remove the conduit surrounding each harness, then

the starter cable

re-cover

it

bunch the wiring

back together again, tape

it

with the conduit, then finish taping

When

5

starter cable, carefully

-

to hold all

-

including

together tightly,

it

exposed wiring.

purchasing battery cables, take the old one(s) with you

when buying new cables.

is vitally

It

m

in

of the

separate the starter cable from the other wiring. Then, after you've installed the

5-5

important that you replace the

mW^ 9 *lJ

^W

4

cables with identical parts.

Clean the threads of the solenoid or ground connection with a

6

wire brush to

remove

rust

and corrosion. Apply a

light

terminal corrosion inhibitor or petroleum jelly to the threads to prevent future corrosion.

7

w JUT.

BlBH^

"

coat of battery

4.4c The positive battery cable to the starter disappears into a conduit and

is

secured along

its

length by tape and clips

Attach the cable to the solenoid or ground connection and tighten

mounting nut/bolt securely.

the

8

Before connecting a

new

cable to the battery

make sure

that

it

reaches the battery post without having to be stretched.

5

Ignition

system

-

Connect the cable

9

The

2

of the high voltage generated by the ignition system, be extremely careful when performing any procedure involving

components.

PCM

alters ignition timing in

accordance with the engine

ture. ter)

The

PCM

[CMP

start-ups,

uses data from the Camshaft Position (Top Dead Cen-

(TDC)] sensors to determine ignition timing during

and anytime

that the crank angle is

culates engine speed based on the data that

The electronic

Module (PCM),

ignition

system consists

of the

Powertrain Control

the ignition switch, the battery, the four ignition coils

and the spark plugs.

1).

speed, the manifold absolute pressure and the engine coolant tempera-

Because

1

con-

general information

WARNING:

ignition

to the positive battery terminal first, then

nect the ground cable to the negative battery terminal (see Section

shaft Position

(CKP) sensor.

(MAP) sensor

to

6.

abnormal. The

PCM

CMP

uses a Manifold Absolute Pressure

(TDC),

cal-

receives from the Crank-

determine manifold absolute pressure. For more

information about the

Chapter

It

it

CKP and MAP

sensors, refer to

.

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

5-6 6

Ignition

system

check

-

I Refer to illustration 6.2

** WARNING: Because of the high voltage generated by the ignition system, use extreme care when performing a procedure involving ignition components.

1

If

a malfunction occurs in the ignition system, check the follow-

ing items:

Make sure

a)

clamps

that the cable

at the battery terminals are clean

and tight. Test the condition of the battery (see Section 3).

b)

the tests, replace

all

c)

Check the

d)

Check any relevant fuses relay

box {see Chapter

Check the

but won't

doesn't pass

ignition coil connections.

and repair 2

// it

it.

in the

12).

If

engine compartment fuse and

they're burned, determine the

cause

the circuit.

tester onto the spark plug and crank the engine;

ignition spark

from each

coil.

If

the engine turns over

disconnect the ignition coil (see Section 7) from any

start,

spark plug and

install

illustration).

and the

Then crank the engine and see

if

the tester

flashes.

3

If

plug to

fire

it

fire

If

If

reaching the

aware

that

even

if

all

four ignition coils are

the spark tester the plugs themselves might be fouled, so

no sparks occur during cranking

primary wire connection 5

is

(repeat the check for each cylinder to verify that the other

remove and inspect the plugs too (see Chapter 4

fire

if

the coil

is

the plug, filament inside

the tester housing will flash

cylinders, the

at the coil.

Make

at

one

cylinder, inspect the

sure that

it's

clean and

-

tight.

at all

probably defective. Have the

is

PCM

checked out

PCM

is

beyond the scope

of the do-it-yourselfer

because

it

requires expensive special tools).

6

Have repair

If

it

the spark plug

7

is in

good shape,

the coil might be defective.

checked out by a dealer service department or other qualified

shop

(again, this procedure

mechanic because

1).

no sparks or intermittent sparks occur during cranking

Ignition coils

PCM

by a dealer service department or other qualified repair shop (testing the

sparks occur during cranking, sufficient voltage

coils are OK). However, be

able to

generating enough voltage to

a calibrated spark tester (available at most auto

parts stores) inline between the coil high-tension terminal

spark plug (see

6.2 To use a calibrated spark tester, remove a coil, insert the tester into the coil, push the boot on the other end of the

Any

it

is

beyond the scope

of the

home

requires special tools).

additional testing of the ignition system

dealer service department or other qualified repair

must be done by shop with the

tools.

replacement

I Refer to illustrations 7.1a, 7.1b, 7.2 and 7.3

2

Disconnect the

electrical

connector from the ignition

coil (see

illustration). 1

Remove

the ignition coil cover (see illustrations).

7.1b ... then remove the fasteners that secure the ignition 7.1a To access an ignition

coil, rotate the

two

fasteners counterclockwise a quarter-turn and the cover

.

.

coil

cover

remove

coil

harness to the valve cover so that you can push the

harness aside as necessary electrical connector(s)

in

order to disconnect the

from the ignition

coil(s)

a

right

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

5-7

7.3 To detach an ignition coil from the valve cover, remove the mounting nut (nut already

7.2 To disconnect the electrical connector from the ignition coil,

depress the locking tab on the side of the

3

Remove

the ignition coil

4

Remove

the ignition coil from the spark plug.

5

Installation is the reverse of removal.

connector and pull tion coil

Charging system

8

alternator (with an integral volt-

an Electrical Load Detector (ELD) unit

battery,

compartment fuse and

the engine

(in

relay box), a charge indicator

(on the instrument cluster) and the wiring connecting

light

components. The charging system supplies ignition system, the lights, the radio, etc.

drivebelt at the

one end

of the engine.

electrical

The

The

power

alternator

is

these

all of

for the

driven by a

charging output within a range of about 13.5 to 14.5 volts. The

which

is

located

in

the engine

sends a variable voltage signal

(PCM)

that varies in

on the charging system by the tion.

The

PCM

uses

compartment fuse and

to the Powertrain Control

accordance with the electrical

is

total

a)

Module

devices and systems

in

b)

Charging system

9

Chapter

1.

ately

Never start the engine with a battery charger connected.

Always disconnect both battery leads before using a battery charger.

e)

The alternator

is

serious injury

if

f)

turned by an engine drivebelt that could cause

your hands, hair or clothes become entangled

Because the alternator could arc or cause a

g)

Wrap a

plastic

and

causing the problem.

First,

check the

all

the tests, replace

it

with a

Check

the external alternator wiring

d)

Check

the drivebelt condition

e)

Check

the alternator

does not

to the battery,

overloaded or shorted

bag over the

alternator

and secure

Check the 120-amp fuse box (see Chapter

and repair the h)

it

out. it

with rubber

is

in the

engine compartment fuse and

2). // it's

burned, determine the cause

circuit.

Check the charge key

1

light

turned

on the dash.

It

f)

Run

(see Chapter

should illuminate when the

ON (engine not running).

on, disconnect the electrical connector

opening the charging

circuit,

and

(15 amp), which 1 ).

for tightness.

the alternator for abnormal noise.

is

the

If it

doesn't

come

ground wire from

now come on

(because by

you have eliminated all charging

voltage. If the light still doesn't illuminate,

and connections.

and tension

mounting bolts

and check

If it

new battery.

c)

the engine

connected directly

the alternator. The charge light should

tight.

Test the condition of the battery (see Section 3).

pass

is

fire if

bands before steam cleaning the engine.

g)

the battery cable clamps, where they connect to the

battery are clean

in

with the engine running.

ignition

b)

be

battery,

check

-

that the alternator is

Make sure

connections to a

electrical circuit

disconnect the wires from the alternator and the battery

following items: a)

is

d)

a malfunction occurs in the charging circuit, do not immedi-

assume

engine

Before using arc-welding equipment to repair any part of the

relay If

after the

c)

should come on when the ignition key

I Refer to illustration 9.3

1

immediately

reconnecting wires to the alternator from the

vehicle,

nance. However, the drivebelt, battery and wires and connections

light

off

a malfunction in the charging system

is

when making

careful

When

it

at the intervals outlined in

should go

terminals.

opera-

The charging system doesn't ordinarily require periodic mainte-

it

remains on, there

it

sure to note the polarity.

relay box,

power demand imposed

If

Be very

ELD

this variable voltage signal to calculate the actual

The dashboard warning

to tighten the igni-

vehicle equipped with an alternator and note the following:

accordingly.

should be inspected

Be sure

(see Section 9).

charging voltage needed and alters the charging voltage output

level of

illustration).

mounting nut securely.

turned to ON, but

started.

alternator's voltage output is

controlled by a conventional internal voltage regulator, which keeps

unit,

mounting nut (see

coil)

general information and precautions

-

The charging system includes the age regulator inside), the

removed from one

located in the

compartment fuse and relay box.

check fuse number 6

left (driver's If

fuse No.

6

side) passenger is

blown, trou-

bleshoot and repair the charge light circuit and then replace the fuse. If the

charge light

Chapter 12).

If it's

still

doesn't

blown, replace

it.

come

on,

check the bulb (see

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

5-8

Make sure

i)

codes

that the

PCM hasn t stored any diagnostic trouble

for the Electronic

6 for more

Load Detector (ELD) system (see Chapter

information about the ELD).

With the ignition key turned

2

voltage with

electrical

all

cooling fan,

lighter,

etc.)

might be slightly higher

to the

OFF

position, check battery

accessories (blower fan, radio, cigarette turned if

off.

It

should be about 12.5 volts

(it

the engine has been turned off for less than

an hour).

Check the charging voltage with

3

engine, raise the engine again.

should

It

now

rpm

to

the engine running. Start the

1500 and check

the battery voltage

be approximately 13.8 to 14.8 volts (see

illustra-

tion).

Load the battery and observe the charging voltage. Turn on the

4 high

beam

and the

headlights, the

radio.

accessory

is

A/C blower on HIGH, the windshield wipers

The voltage should drop and then come back up as each

selected.

If

the charging system

voltage should stay above 13.5 volts. volts, the

5

is

working properly the

to idle

engine rpm. Apply the brakes and observe the charging

in

voltage at

idle.

Turn

It

off all

should remain above 13

beam

the electrical loads (high

1600 rpm and watch

10 Alternator

-

above 15 7

If

volts.

the charging voltage does not exhibit distinct

changes when

engine rpm increases and accessory loads are added, the voltage regu-

volts.

headlights, the

A/C

blower on HIGH, the windshield wipers and the radio), run the engine at

battery terminals and note the indicated voltage with the

and observe the charging

The charging voltage should not drop below 13 volts with the

decrease

9.3 To check charging voltage, hook up a multimeter to the

engine running, which should be about 13.5 volts

defective.

Lower the engine rpm back

voltage.

6

charging system

is

the voltage drops below 13

If

the charging voltage rise.

It

should not

rise

lator is defective.

and battery are

If

the charging voltages are low and the drivebelts

all in

good condition, the

situation, replace the alternator

alternator

is

defective. In this

and voltage regulator as a single

unit.

removal and installation

ALL MODELS 1

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see Sec-

tion 1).

## CAUTION: The radio on some models is equipped with an anti-theft system. So make sure that you have the correct anti-theft codes before disconnecting the battery. You'll also want to write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons.

COUPE AND SEDAN 10.3 To detach the alternator output cable I Refer to illustrations 10.3, 10.6a

and 10.6b

clip

from the

remove the nut

alternator, depress this lock button (1),

(2)

that attaches the alternator output cable to the stud terminal

2

Remove

the

power steering pump

belt (see

Chapter

remove the power steering pump (see Chapter 10) and

1 ),

then

set the

on the backside

pump

of the alternator, set the output cable aside,

then disconnect the alternator electrical connector (3)

aside.

—Note: Do NOT disconnect any 3 nator,

of the

power steering hoses.

Disconnect the harness clip that secures the harness to the

remove the nut

alter-

that attaches the alternator output cable to the

stud on the backside of the alternator and disconnect the electrical

connector from the alternator (see

illustration).

Set the alternator output

4

Remove

5

6

the alternator/air conditioning compressor drivebelt (see

Loosen the lug nuts on the

Remove

7

If

alternator.

you're replacing the alternator, take the old one with you

purchasing the replacement

it

left

front wheel, raise the front of the

securely on jackstands and

remove the

left

front wheel.

the lock bolt and adjusting bolt (see illustration) from

the bracket between the alternator and the air conditioning compressor,

unit.

Make sure

in

8

into the

Many

one.

When

numbers

-

housing or printed on a tag attached

sure the numbers are the

same on both

new/rebuilt alternators

you might have

-

they should

number, size and location as the terminals on the old

alternator. Finally, look at the identification

Make

when

that the new/rebuilt unit

looks identical to the old alternator. Look at the terminals

stamped

1).

vehicle, place

remove the

be the same

cable aside.

Chapter

then remove the upper alternator mounting bolt (see illustration) and

to

swap

buying an

DO NOT

they will be to the housing.

alternators.

have a pulley

installed,

so

the pulley from the old unit to the new/rebuilt

alternator, find out the store's policy regarding

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

10.6a To detach the alternator from bracket,

remove the lock

pulley swaps.

Some

bolt (1)

its

removing the pulley and do

it

nuts to the torque listed

the Chapter

in

10 Reconnect the cable

PCM

your

Be sure

to tighten the alter-

procedure (see Section

1).

the alternator

When

to the torque listed in this Chapter's Specifications'.

After reconnecting the cable to the negative terminal of the bat-

PCM

idle learn

procedure (see Section

When

1).

operating correctly.

is

then

to the negative terminal of the battery,

idle learn

upper mounting

Installation is the reverse of removal. Tighten the alternator

perform the

tery,

its

this bolt

you're done, check the charging voltage (see Section 9) to verify that

Specifications.

1

15

remove

mounting bolts 16

mounting bolts securely. Tighten the wheel lug

nator adjusting and

perform the

If

have to purchase

yourself.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

9.

point,

bolt (2)

stores perform this service free of charge.

local auto parts store doesn't offer this service, you'll

a puller for

10.6b To detach the alternator from

lower mounting

and the adjusting

5-9

HATCHBACK

you're

done, check the charging voltage (see Section 9) to verify that the alternator

is

operating correctly.

CR-V

bumper cover

17 Remove the

front

18 Remove the

right headlight

19 Remove the coolant reservoir (see Chapter

20 Remove the accessory 11

Unscrew

ground strap

the battery

bolt

from the radiator cross-

member, remove the cover from the radiator crossmember and remove the upper radiator ator - removal

and

mounting brackets and rubber insulators (see "Radiinstallation" in

Chapter

mounting bolts

first will

give you a

little

13 Disconnect the

ment fuse and

relay box).

goes

"wiggle room" for disconnect-

connector and the black wire from the to the

ELD

Then detach the harness

nator and set the electrical harness aside.

14 Refer

to

Steps 7 and

The

starting

ELD, the 40

fuse

(all

clip

from the

alter-

of the battery, the

80 amp

three of which are located

in

solenoid and starter motor, and the wires connecting these

ponents. The solenoid

is

solenoid/starter motor

assembly

mounting bolts

25 tery,

mounted

is

is

is

on the

directly

installed

front of the

turned to the

com-

starter motor.

on top

com-

The

energy

to the starter motor,

cranking the engine.

compart-

from the

alter-

the alternator.

to the torque listed in this Chapter's Specifications.

PCM

idle learn

procedure (see Section

When

1).

operating correctly.

is

of the transaxle

when

with a manual transaxle, the starter can only be operated

the clutch pedal

is

depressed. On models with an automatic

transaxle, the starter can only be operated

PARK

or

starter.

on

a)

Excessive cranking of the starter motor can overheat serious damage. Never operate the starter motor for

position, the starter

of

is in

to allow

it

it

and cause

more than 15

to cool for at least

two minutes. b)

The battery supplies the

which does the actual work

the shift lever

Always observe the following precautions when working on the

engine block on CR-Vs and

START

when

NEUTRAL.

starting system:

actuated through the starter control circuit. The starter sole-

noid then connects the battery to the electrical

Remove

clip

8.

seconds at a time without pausing

the ignition key

unit in the engine

After reconnecting the cable to the negative terminal of the bat-

perform the

hatchbacks.

solenoid

ELD

Installation is the reverse of removal. Tighten the alternator

On models

fuse, the

the engine

the under-dash fuse and relay box), the starter control relay and the

When

to the

Then detach the harness

Steps 7 and

to

bolts.

general information and precautions

-

coupes and sedans, and on the

goes

relay box).

mounting

connector and the black wire from the

you're done, check the charging voltage (see Section 9) to verify that

the alternator.

partment fuse and relay box), the ignition switch, the starter cut relay

starter

23 Refer

the alternator

system consists

amp

Remove

engine compart-

8.

Starting system

11

unit in the

electrical

alternator (the black wire

24

electrical

the three alternator

22 Disconnect the

3).

drivebelt (see Chapter 1).

nator and set the electrical harness aside.

ing the electrical connections).

alternator (the black wire

Remove

21

ment fuse and

3).

12 Remove the three alternator mounting bolts (removing the

(in

(see Chapter 11).

housing (see Chapter 12).

The starter

cause a c)

is

fire if

connected directly

to the battery

and could arc or

mishandled, overloaded or shorted

out.

Always detach the cable from the negative terminal of the battery before working on the starting system.

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

5-10

12 Starter motor and

circuit

check

-

Refer to illustrations 12.3 and 12.4

ment fuse and operation.

1

a malfunction occurs

If

assume

in

the starting circuit, do not immediately

that the starter is causing the problem. First,

voltage

the battery cable clamps, where they connect to the

and

battery are clean

any

3 battery cables (see Section 4). Replace

defective battery cables with

new

ones.

pass

all

the tests, replace

d)

Check the

e)

Check

f)

Check the fuses

starter

with a

new

does not

end of Chapter

mounting bolts

in the

(see Chapter 12).

battery.

If

12.

the shift lever is in

(manual

PARK or NEUTRAL

it.

transaxle).

If

ammeter (see

Make sure

make sure

cold temperatures,

warmed 4

(automatic transaxle) or

in

good condition and

the battery

If

in

cases

the starter

is

receiving voltage but does not activate,

solenoid

is

be sure to

defective. In

try

and

some

rare cases, the

engine

rotate the crankshaft pulley (see

may be

remove likely the

seized, so

Chapter 2) before

the bench, install one jumper cable from the negative terminal

operate correctly to provide battery voltage to the starter sole-

body

noid.

nal (+)

The starter cut relay

located in the fuse/relay box under the driver's side of the

dash. Refer to Chapter 12 for relay testing procedures. If

the starter does not activate

to the start position,

determine

if

check

the solenoid

the ignition switch.

when

the ignition switch

turned

for battery voltage to the solenoid. This will

is

receiving the correct voltage signal from

Connect

a voltmeter to the starter solenoid "S" ter-

Then note the indicated voltage when an assistant turns the

ignition switch to the

battery voltage.

If

diagrams

end

The two

at the

starting

START

there's of

position.

no voltage

It

of the starter. Install another

on the battery

Install a starter

to the

B+

a vise on

in

(-) to

terminal on the starter (see illustration).

switch and apply battery voltage to the solenoid S ter-

and overrunning clutch extend and

rotate the pinion drive.

pinion drive extends but does not rotate, the solenoid the starter

motor

is

clicks, the solenoid

defective.

If

there

is

is

If

the

operating but

no movement but the solenoid

and/or the starter motor

is

defective.

If

the solenoid

plunger extends and rotates the pinion drive, the starter/solenoid

assembly

is

working properly.

should be about the same as

at the

S

terminal, refer to the wiring

Chapter 12 and check the starting system fuses.

system fuses are located inside the engine compart-

Ol Ammeter

12V Battery 12.3 To use an inductive ammeter, simply hold the ammeter over the positive or negative battery cable (whichever cable

has better clearance)

the

jumper cable from the positive termi-

minal (for 10 seconds or less) and observe the solenoid plunger, shift lever

is

is

before performing the tests.

and check the starter/solenoid assembly on the bench. Most

7

extremely

of

the battery and/or engine block

checks for the clutch activation system. These systems must

starter cut relay.

illus-

Several conditions might affect the starter's

and cables must be clean and not corroded. Also,

12).

gear position switch check and adjustment procedure.

Check the operation of the

10 sec-

the starter motor exceeds

proceeding. With the starter/solenoid assembly mounted

is

minal.

should not exceed 380 amps.

(for

should not drop below

Refer to Chapter 12 wiring diagrams for the necessary circuit

h)

2

It

sure to check the battery specifications carefully. The battery terminals

the clutch pedal is pressed (manual transaxle). Refer to Chapter for the

This test must be performed with

cold-cranking rating must not be under-rated for the application. Be

cause and

diagrams at the end of Chapter

transaxle) or clutch start circuit

It

cranking power. The battery must be

Check the operation of the gear position switch (automatic

g)

battery.

and observe the battery voltage.

these values, replace

engine compartment fuse and relay box

rect operation (see the wiring

from the engine (see Section

8.5 volts. Also, observe the current draw using an

for tightness.

they're burned, determine the

starter

assembly on the engine. Crank the engine over

less)

tration).

repair the circuit. Also, check the ignition switch circuit for cor-

•

If

engage and spin the

the starter turns over slowly, check the starter cranking voltage

If

onds or

solenoid wiring and connections. Refer to the

wiring diagrams at the the starter

it

If it

remove the

and the current draw from the the starter

Test the condition of the battery (see Section 3).

c)

available but the starter motor doesn't

is

13) and bench test the starter (see Step 4).

tight.

Check the condition of the

b)

starter cut relay for correct

fuse/relay panel. Refer to Chapter 12 for help with testing relays.

driveplate ring gear,

Make sure

check the

starter cut relay is located inside the left (driver's side)

check the follow-

ing items: a)

relay box. Also

The

12.4 Starter motor bench testing details

172031-5-14.7

HAYNESI

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 13 Starter motor

5-11

removal and installation

-

MODELS

ALL

Detach the cable from the negative terminal

1

Section

of the battery (see

1).

** CAUTION: The radio on some models is equipped with an anti-theft system. Make sure that you have the correct anti-theft codes before disconnecting the battery. You'll also want to write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons.

COUPE AND SEDAN I Refer to illustration 13.3

Remove

2

and

13.3 To remove the solenoid/starter assembly, disconnect the air intake resonator (see "Air

installation" in

Chapter

filter

housing

-

removal

4).

the S terminal (2) on the solenoid, then

Clearly label, then disconnect the wires from the terminals on the

3

motor solenoid (see

starter

the starter cable from the B terminal (1) and the wire from

illustration).

Also disconnect any clips that

mounting bolts

(3)

remove the two

(coupe/sedan shown, CR-V and

hatchback similar)

attach the wiring to the starter assembly.

Remove

4

the starter mounting bolts (see illustration) and detach

and the intake manifold bracket, then remove the intake manifold

the starter.

5

Installation is the reverse of removal.

mounting bolts

starter

tions, then

to the

torque listed

Be sure

in this

to tighten the

Chapter's Specifica-

reconnect the cable to the negative terminal of the battery

6

When

9 starter

Clearly label, then disconnect the wires from the terminals on the

motor solenoid. Also disconnect any clips

to the starter

(see Section 1).

Section

bracket.

you're done, perform the

PCM

idle learn

procedure (see

that attach the wiring

assembly.

10 Remove the two

starter

mounting bolts and remove the

starter

motor.

1).

11

CR-V AND HATCHBACK

starter

Installation is the reverse of removal.

mounting bolts

to the

torque listed

Be sure

in this

to tighten the

Chapter's Specifica-

tions, then reconnect the cable to the negative terminal of the battery

7

Disconnect the knock sensor

sensor

8

-

replacement"

in

Chapter

On hatchbacks, remove

electrical

connector (see "Knock

6).

the bolt that attaches the harness bracket

(see Section

12

When

Section

1).

1).

you're done, perform the

PCM

idle learn

procedure (see

5-12

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Specifications

General Battery voltage

Engine

12

off

Engine running

12.5 volts

1-3-4-2

Firing order

Torque specifications Starter

to

Approximately 13.5 volts

Ft-lbs (unless otherwise indicated)

Nm

mounting bolts

Coupe and sedan

(both bolts)

33

44

CR-V and hatchback Smaller (10x1.25

mm)

33

44

47

64

(pivot) bolt

33

44

Adjuster lock bolt

17

24

16

22

Larger

(12x1.25 mm)

bolt

bolt

Alternator mounting bolts

Coupe and sedan Upper

CR-V and hatchback

Section 1

General information

2

CHECK ENGINE

2

On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system and trouble codes

3

Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor

4

Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor

5

Electrical

6

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor

7

Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor

8

Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor - replacement

9

Knock sensor

10

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor

1

Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor

12

Oxygen sensors

13

Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch

14

Throttle Position (TP) sensor - replacement

15

Transmission range switch

16

Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)

17

Powertrain Control Module

light

on

-

18

Idle Air

19

Intake Manifold

replacement

-

Load Detector (ELD) unit

-

replacement

-

replacement

-

-

replacement

replacement

replacement

-

-

-

replacement

replacement

replacement

-

Control (IAC) valve

replacement

replacement and adjustment -

replacement

(PCM) -

-

-

removal and installation

replacement

Runner Control (IMRC) system

-

description

and component replacement 20

Catalytic converter

21

Evaporative Emissions Control (EVAP) system

-

general description, check and replacement -

description and

component replacement 22

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system

-

description and

component replacement 23

Positive Crankcase Ventilation

(PCV) system

-

description, check and

component replacement 24

Variable Valve Timing and

system

-

description and

Lift

Electronic Control

component replacement

(VTEC)

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

6-2

General information

1

> Refer to illustration 1.4

Variable Valve Timing

To prevent pollution of the atmosphere from incompletely burned

and evaporating gases, and

economy, a number They include

of

to

and

Lift

Timing and

"intelligent" Variable Valve

maintain good driveability and fuel

Electronic Control (VTEC) system

on some coupes and sedans)

(optional,

Lift

Electronic

Control/Variable Valve Timing Control (i-VTEC/VTC) system

emission control systems are incorporated.

(CR-V and hatchback)

the:

This Chapter includes general descriptions Catalytic converter Electrical

Load Detector (ELD)

(when possible)

Evaporative Emissions Control (EVAP) system

these and other

dure

Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) system Injection

(PGM-FI) system

of the

carefully.

is

beyond your

systems is

listed

above. Before assuming

malfunctioning, check the fuel and

The diagnosis

of

some emission

engine

control system)

problems check

all

is

ability,

control If

a proce-

consult a dealer service department or

Remember, the most frequent cause

other repair shop. (the electronic

each

devices requires specialized tools, equipment and training.

On-Board Diagnostic-ll (OBD-II) system

Programmed Fuel

systems

ignition

Runner Control (IMRC) system (CR-V only)

for

an emissions control system

that

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system Intake Manifold

of

emissions-related devices and component replacement procedures

of

emissions

simply a loose or broken wire or vacuum hose, so always

hose and wiring connections

first.

•Note: Because of a Federally mandated extended warranty which covers the emissions control system components, check with your dealer about warranty coverage before working on

any emissions-related systems. Once the warranty has expired, you may wish to perform some of the component checks and/or replacement procedures in this Chapter to save money. Pay close attention Chapter.

It

to

any special precautions outlined

should be noted that the illustrations

in this

of the various

systems

might not exactly match the system installed on your vehicle because of

annual changes

because

of

made by

A Vehicle Emissions tion) is located in the

the

hood

the manufacturer during production and

"running changes"

made

during a model year.

Control Information (VECI) label (see illustra-

engine compartment, either on the underside

or attached to the radiator support or

one

of

of the strut towers.

This label specifies the important emissions systems on the vehicle

and

it

provides the important specifications for tune-ups. Part of the

Vacuum Hose Routing Diagram,

1.4 The Vehicle Emission Control Information (VECI) label

VECI

specifies the emission-control systems on your vehicle, and

hose schematic with emissions components

includes important tune-up specifications and a

vacuum hose

label, the

the engine or emissions systems, the

VECI

provides a

identified.

label

vacuum

When

servicing

and the vacuum hose

routing diagram should always be checked for up-to-date information.

routing diagram

On Board Diagnostic (OBD) system and trouble codes

SCAN TOOL INFORMATION I Refer to illustration 2.1

Hand-held scanners are the most powerful and

1

analyzing engine

management systems used on

(see illustration). Early

later

versatile tools for

model vehicles

model scanners handle codes and some diag-

nostics for

many systems. Each brand scan

carefully to

match the

year,

make and model

tool

must be examined

of the vehicle

you are work-

ing on. Often, interchangeable cartridges are available to access the particular

manufacturer (Chrysler, Ford,

manufacturers

will

GM, Honda, Toyota

specify by continent (Asia, Europe,

etc.).

USA,

Some

etc.).

—Note: An aftermarket generic scanner should work with any model covered by this manual. Before purchasing a generic scan

tool, contact the

manufacturer of the scanner you're plan-

it will work properly with the OBD-II system you want to scan. If necessary, of course, you can always have the codes extracted by a dealer service department or an independent repair shop with a professional scan tool.

ning to buy and verify that

2.1

Scanners

like

these from Actron and AutoXray are

powerful diagnostic aids

-

programmed with comprehensive

diagnostic information, they can

you want

to

tell

you

just

about anything

know about your engine management system

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS conveyed by

OBD SYSTEM GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2

All

an on-board computer known as the Pow-

tem. This system consists ot ertrain Control

Module (PCM), and information sensors, which monitor

various functions of the engine and send data to the

PCM.

This system

incorporates a series of diagnostic monitors that detect and identify

and store the

fuel injection

and emissions control systems

mation

computer memory. This updated system also

in

the

faults

infor-

tests sen-

sors and output actuators, diagnoses drive cycles, freezes data and

sor

is

dash

PCM

The

area.

is

PCM

relays, etc.).

of

receives, the

it

output signals to control various relays, solenoids

and other actuators. The

4

It

PCM

a

isn't

It

receives data

sensors and other electronic components (switches,

Based on the information

PCM

economy and

emissions, fuel

the "brain" of

and emissions system.

the electronically controlled fuel

from a number

is

good

is

PCM

fuel injectors)

(i.e.

idea to attempt diagnosis or replacement of the

or emission control

components

home

at

On coupes and sedans,

off.

end

of the cylinder head, near the

damage

PCM,

to the

this warranty, take the vehicle to a dealer service

or a

ECT sensor

if

is

void

PCM

the

measures the it's

system

located at the

fuel tank

pressure

to

pressure sensor

PCM

of the

pressure sensor

tests the

located to the

is

EVAP system,

EVAP

of

left

EVAP

canister, right

valve.

Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor

11

mainshaft) speed sensor

-

The input

shaft (or

a magnetic pick-up coil located on the front

is

automatic transaxle (coupe and sedan) or on the rear side of the

On OBD-II

vehicles, the

PCM

compares the signal

from the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor with the signal from the

wear)

(i.e.

is

occurring inside the transaxle.

12 Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor itors the

to the

temperature of the

air

The IAT sensor mon-

PCM. On coupes and sedans, the IAT sensor is located at the left On CR-Vs and hatchbacks, the IAT sensor

located on the air intake duct.

Knock sensor

-

The knock sensor

that oscillates in proportion to

is

a "piezoelectric" crystal

engine vibration. (The term piezoelectric

refers to the property of certain crystals that

The BPP switch

-

entering the engine and sends a signal

of the intake manifold.

13

INFORMATION SENSORS -

the

of the cylinder head.

fuel tank

purge the tank when the pressure becomes excessive. The

above the two-way/bypass solenoid

is

Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch

when

end

left

The

-

also used to control fuel tank pressure by signaling the

fuel tank

end

system component malfunctions.

5

ECT sensor is located at the right EGR valve. On CR-Vs and hatch-

is

may

department

PCM

the

10 Fuel tank pressure sensor

emissions system components and because any owner-induced the sensors and/or the control devices

also helps the

it

output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor to calculate whether slippage

while the vehicle

under warranty. Because of a Federally mandated warranty which covers the

and

ignition timing,

and

transaxle (CR-V).

driveability of the vehicle.

The ECT sen-

determine when to turn the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system on

generates

specifically calibrated to optimize the

and

the air/fuel mixture ratio

and

located below the center of the

instrument panel, mounted to the firewall. The

-

perature of the engine coolant. The

This powerful diagnostic computer must be accessed using an

the driver's

located inside the engine

PCM, which uses this data to determine the temECT sensor helps the PCM control

voltage signal to the

backs, the

OBD-II scan tool and 16-pin Data Link Connector (DLC) located under

is

a thermistor (temperature-sensitive variable resistor) that sends a

clears codes.

3

unit

relay box.

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor

9

models are equipped with the second generation OBD-II sys-

The ELD

this signal.

compartment fuse and

6-3

produce a voltage when

is

subjected to a mechanical stress.) The oscillation of the piezoelectric located at the top of the brake pedal.

when

closes

the brake pedal

It's

a normally open switch that

PCM,

applied and sends a signal to the

is

crystal

produces a voltage output

when

retards the ignition timing

which interprets

this signal as

its

cue

to

is

lock. For information regarding the

When

the engine

and

is

its

operating normally, the knock sensor voltage signal

is

steady.

Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor

duces a signal

that the

CMP

PCM

sequence

-

The

CMP

uses to identify the number

of the fuel injectors.

sensor exceeds a design threshold. (Detonation

located on the

is

left

1

cylinder and

On coupes and sedans,

neously combusts the remaining If

air/fuel mixture, resulting in a "ping-

allowed to continue, detonation

CMP

On

sensor A and

located at the

CMP

CR-V and

the

left

CMP

end

is

diminished.

sensor B (TDC sensor).

is

located at the

On

same

left

end

these models,

function as the

VTEC

for the

CMP

14 Manifold Absolute Pressure

CMP

sensor

system.

sensor, which

A

CMP

that the

PCM

uses

to

On coupes and sedans,

the pressure or

located on the throttle

The

sensor on coupe and sedan

The

CKP

level

MAP

knock sensor

is

the

CKP

is

the

load on the system and keeps the

can

The ELD monitors the

trols the voltage output of the alternator in

informed. The

response

PCM

PCM

MAP

the throttle plate, inside the

from zero instead

The

MAP

advance and

fuel

from sea-

speed sensor

is

it

enrichment.

speed sensor

-

The output

a magnetic pick-up coil, which

located on top of the transaxle. The output shaft speed sensor pro-

vides the Powertrain Control

Module (PCM)

with information about the

elecrotational

speed

of the output shaft in the transmission.

conthis information to control the torque converter

to the data

of

sensor converts the

uses this data to determine engine load so that

alter the ignition

shaft (or countershaft) is

PCM

i.e.

psi).

15 Output shaft (countershaft)

CKP

chain) end of the block. -

The

models, monitors

absolute pressure into a variable voltage signal that changes with the

located on the

On CR-Vs and hatchbacks,

Load Detector (ELD)

atmospheric pressure (14.7

pressure. The

sensor

all

sensor .measures intake manifold pressure

sensor pro-

determine the position of the

located on the rear side of the engine, near the right (timing

Electrical

the

(MAP) sensor body on

vacuum downstream from

sen-

(timing belt) end of the engine, under the timing belt cover, near the

crankshaft timing belt sprocket.

trical

is

intake manifold.

Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor

crankshaft.

8

located on the backside of the engine

and vacuum on the absolute scale,

duces a signal

is

is

On CR-Vs and hatchbacks,

of the cylinder

engines.

sensor

oil filter.

of the cylinder head, near the intake camshaft.

monitors the position of the camshaft the

block, near the

located on the front side of the block.

sensor B (TDC sensor)

fulfills

sedans, the knock sensor

CMP sensors: CMP sensor A is

On coupes and

hatchback, there are two

head, near the exhaust camshaft.

sor B

is

(timing belt) end of the cylinder

head, under the timing belt cover, near the camshaft timing belt sprocket.

an uncontrolled

explosion, after the spark occurs at the spark plug, which sponta-

ing" or "slapping" sound.)

sensor

is

sensor pro-

annoying, and engine performance

left

detona-

engine vibration increases, and the oscillation of the knock

switch, refer to Chapter 9.

to time the firing

7

When

replacement and adjustment of the tion occurs,

6

the

PCM, which

also used to disengage the brake shift interoscillates consistently

BPP

monitored by the

disengage the torque converter threshold.

The BPP switch

clutch.

that is

the oscillation exceeds a certain

and

The

PCM

to calculate

uses

speed

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

6-4

scheduling and the correct operating pressure for the transaxle. On

OBD-II vehicles, the

PCM

speed sensor

whether slippage

to calculate

wear)

(i.e.

Oxygen sensors

generates a small variable voltage signal

between the oxygen content

ambient

tent in the

air.

in

a galvanic battery that

is

proportion to the difference

the exhaust stream and the oxygen con-

PCM

The

upstream oxygen sensor

in

uses the voltage signal from the

oxygen sensors: one upstream sensor (ahead

converter) and a

downstream oxygen sensor

oxygen sensor

On

and the downstream

On coupes and sedans

located below the catalyst.

is

the

PCM

is

is

On coupes and

located on the right end of the

On CR-Vs,

located on the

it's

left

end

of

the transaxle, under a small cover. (Hatchbacks are not available with

20 Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) switch that

-

The VSS

VSS

driven by the differential. The

is

PCM

is

a Hall Effect type

receives a 5-volt refer-

and generates a pulsed output

PCM

that the

determine vehicle speed (the number of pulses per minute

uses

to

rises

and

falls in

not CR-Vs) The

VTEC

with

able to determine

VSS

proportion to the speed). The

used on

is

all

manual transaxles and on some automatics (coupes and sedans, but

located above the catalytic con-

is

verter (which is a part of the exhaust manifold)

sensor

transaxle, under a small cover.

ence signal from the

of the catalytic

the catalyst).

(at

coupes and sedans with non-VTEC engines, there are two oxygen sensors; the upstream

Thus

an automatic transaxle.)

14.7:1 by constantly adjusting the "on-time" of the fuel injectors. There are two

lever.

able to determine the correct pressure for the

is

sedans, the transmission range switch

maintain a "stoichiometric" air/fuel ratio of

to

manual

electronic pressure control system of the transaxle.

An oxygen sensor

-

to the position of the

the gear selected and

is

occurring inside the transaxle.

16

PCM

The

that act as a voltage divider.

monitors the voltage output signal from the switch, which corresponds

(mainshaft) speed sensor with the signal from the output shaft (countershaft)

step-down resistors

series of

the signal from the input shaft

compares

VSS

is

located on top of the transaxle, right above the

differential.

engines, there are either two or three oxygen sensors. a)

VTEC coupes and sedans

with a catalyst in the exhaust manifold

OUTPUT ACTUATORS

(same manifold/catalyst assembly as non-VTEC engines), the upstream sensor

is

downstream sensor

located right above the catalyst is

and the

located right below the catalyst. There is

mixed with intake

end of the pipe

downstream sensor

under the

that contains the catalyst,

installed at the rear

end of the

which

gen sensor (Honda

is

refers to

it

as an air/fuel ratio sensor)

The downstream sensor

is

of the catalyst.

pressure exceeds a certain threshold

at idle or

maneuvers, the switch sends a voltage signal

compensate

line, right

rack assembly.

(pressure

is

On CR-Vs,

line), right

the

PSP

switch

above the steering

on hatchbacks. They have

is

in

rack. (There's

Power

Electrical

located

18 Throttle Position (TP) sensor

-

sends back a voltage signal

the "feed hose"

PCM when

the throttle

between. The

PCM

is

uses

no PSP switch

The TP sensor

is

a poten-

PCM

opening angle

This voltage signal

tells

the

closed, half-open, wide open or anywhere

in

by the PCM). The

TP sensor

located on the throttle body, on the end of the throttle plate shaft.

TP sensor

is

not removable on any model.

If

it's

is

The

defective, replace the

19 Transmission range switch is

The transmission range switch,

used only on automatics, functions

Park/Neutral Position (PNP) switch: in

-

it

lights

vapors

to the

when

the shift lever

sends a voltage signal

to the

is

it

moved

EVAP

in

closes the circuit for the to Reverse.

The

PCM

also

transmission range switch, which uses a

closes

it

and maintenance

canister,

tests

The EVAP

-

underneath the vehicle.

EVAP

fresh air through the

vacuum

canister.

in

the fuel tank by

The bypass solenoid

EVAP -

leak checks.

When

the engine

put under a load (hard acceleration, passing, going up a steep trailer, etc.),

amounts

of

hill,

combustion chamber temperature increases.

When combustion chamber sive

It

canister in proportion to the pressure

temperature exceeds 2500 degrees, exces-

oxides of nitrogen (NOx) are produced.

When combined

NOx

is

a pre-

with hydrocarbons

compounds" (ROCs) and nitrate

sunlight,

it

and other nasty

The PCM-controlled EGR valve allows exhaust gases

to

be

recir-

culated back to the intake manifold where they dilute the incoming air/fuel mixture,

which lowers the combustion chamber temperature

and decreases the amount

of

NOx produced

Coupes and sedans (except

for

during high-load condi-

pre-2004 non-VTEC models) are

equipped with an EGR system. (CR-Vs and hatchbacks don't use an

EGR

system.)

25 Fuel injectors

-

fuel into the intake ports,

injectors, see

Chapter

The

fuel injectors,

where

PCM

it

is

amount plate

control. For

by the

air,

are

more information about

bypass the

-

the

The IAC valve controls the

throttle plate

(nearly closed) idle position.

PCM. When

fine mist of

4.

of air allowed to

is at its

which spray a

mixed with incoming

26 Idle Air Control (IAC) valve

a conventional

prevents the engine from starting

any gear other than Park or Neutral, and

back-up

like

located underneath

tests.

EVAP

located at the

inductive coils under

throttle body.

which

is

tions.

along with information from other

injector solenoid is energized

for inspection

24 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve

stuff.

and

is

normally open, but

is

forms ozone, nitrogen dioxide and nitrogen

sensors, to calculate injector "pulse width" (the interval of time during

which an

fuel

is

(HC), other "reactive organic

that varies in relation to the

this data,

EVAP system

cursor of photochemical smog.

Steering).

of the throttle plate inside the throttle body.

the

The EVAP canister vent

which

EVAP two-way valve/bypass solenoid valve

pulling a

to the steering

tiometer that receives a constant voltage input from the

off

-

canister,

valve opens to bypass the two-way valve during

power steering

connection

line

the

PCM, which raises on the engine. On

located on the

above the pressure

EVAP

The canister vent shut valve

two-way valve

to the

for the extra load

coupes and sedans, the PSP switch

When

located on the

OBD-II leak and pressure

for

23

drawing

during low speed

where

into the intake manifold,

then burned along with the normal air/fuel

air,

inside the fuel tank, and prevents excessive

The PSP switch

-

monitors the pressure inside the power steering system.

pressure

and

sends

Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch

the idle slightly to

and seals

installed in

installed in the

is

is

the vehicle.

a single cat-

normally closed. But

is

allows the fuel vapors that are

EVAP canister vent shut valve

22

shut valve

the

located under the vehicle). The upstream oxy-

the front end of the catalyst.

end

and

the

it

mixture, under certain operating conditions.

at

catalyst.

CR-Vs and hatchbacks have two oxygen sensors (and

alytic converter,

vehicle, with

below the mounting flange

right

The EVAP canister purge valve

drawn

canister to be

in

the forward

17

EVAP

stored they're

fold have only a single catalytic converter

rear

do so by the PCM,

VTEC coupes and sedans

an upstream oxygen sensor

All

to

located underneath the vehicle.

without a catalyst in the exhaust mani-

-

located on the throttle body. The purge valve

when ordered

also a third oxygen sensor at the second catalyst, which is

b)

EVAP canister purge valve

21 is

the engine

is

when

the throttle

The IAC valve

is

controlled

placed under an additional load

(high power steering pressure or running the air conditioning

at idle

com-

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS pressor during low-speed maneuvers, for example), the engine can run roughly, stumble and even

PCM

opens the IAC valve

come

the extra load

on the underside

To prevent this from happening, the

stall.

speed enough

to increase the idle

imposed on the engine. The IAC valve

27 Ignition coils

-

There

one

is

on top

I Refer to illustration 2.32

is

mounted

Module (PCM). There

ignition coil per spark plug.

The

are available at

profile.

It

ing

the device that the

is

the

by altering the hydraulic pressure

special circuit that circulates through the rocker arms.

noid valve

VTEC system uses

in

response to engine speed. On

in

D17A6), the VTEC solenoid valve

VTEC

SOHC

The VTEC sole-

-

CR-Vs and hatchbacks

VTEC system known

VTEC

all

of the stored

DTCs, look them up on

chart.

After troubleshooting the

source of each

DTC make any

neces-

Clearing the

DTCs tool in

accordance with the instruc-

tions provided by the scan tool's manufacturer.

solenoid valve

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES 36 The accompanying

control sole-

oil

newer type

are equipped with a

as "intelligent" Variable Valve Timing and

of

VTC

tor is inside the

camshaft timing chain sprocket. The

is

VTC

the PCM-controlled device that controls the

sure to the actuator. For more information about the

solenoid valve and the

VTEC

VTC

actua-

oil

(there are many,

list

many more DTCs

of the Diagnostic Trouble

pres-

tool).

If,

after

you have checked

persists,

component

(if

applic-

or circuit, the problem

have the vehicle checked by a dealer service department or

other qualified repair shop.

system, refer to Section 24.

OBTAINING AND CLEARING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE

CODES (DTCS) 30

All

models covered by

diagnostics.

When

the

PCM

this

manual are equipped with on-board

recognizes a malfunction

emission control system, component or tion Indicator Light (MIL)

MIL

play the

(DTC)

is

until the

DTCs

stored

31 Before outputting inspect cal

ALL

electrical

connections are

that all

is

fixed

PCM. any DTCs stored

will

continue to dis-

You'll

need a scan

in

the

PCM, thoroughly

clean and free of corrosion.

hoses are correctly connected,

tion (no cracks or tears). Also, is

fit

tightly

make sure

and are

that the

will correct the

all

electri-

And make sure in

engine

good condi-

is

tuned up.

A

probably one of the biggest causes of emis-

sion-related malfunctions. Often, simply giving the engine a

up

tool to

the

connectors and hoses. Make sure that

tight,

poorly running engine

a monitored

in

turns on the Malfunc-

and the Diagnostic Trouble Code

PCM's memory.

in

it

PCM

on the dash. The

problem

cleared from the

access any

circuit,

problem.

at

available to professional

and repaired the connectors, wire harness and vacuum hoses able) for an emission-related system,

control

oil

tables are a

can be accessed by a do-it-yourselfer working

mechanics with proprietary scan tools and software, but those codes

control

oil

that

cannot be accessed by a generic scan

these models are also equipped with Variable Valve Timing Control

(VTC), which changes the phase of the intake camshaft. The

Codes (DTCs)

home

Lift

VTEC components,

Electronic Control (i-VETEC). Besides the usual

solenoid valve

accompanying DTC

34

tool to

system, see Section 24.

29 Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC)

noid valve

of the

is

DTCs.

35 Clear the DTCs with the scan

engines (D17A2 and

the

which

to control the oil

located at the right rear corner of

more information about

the cylinder head. For

and the

is

the

illustration),

sary repairs or replace the defective component(s).

a

pressure that locks and unlocks each adjacent pair of intake rocker

arms

Simply plug the connector

column. Then follow the instructions included with the scan

33 Once you have outputted

VTEC sysone cam lobe

On VTEC-equipped models,

profiles

stores.

located under the lower edge of the dash, just to the right of the steer-

turn the primary side of the coils

and timing by using more than

lift

changes cam

inexpensive generic scan tools (see illustration 2.1)

most auto parts

PCM

28 Variable Valve Timing and Lift Electronic Control

tem changes valve

which are equipped with On-Board Diag-

scan tool into the diagnostic connector (see

extract the

-

of

no separate ignition control module.

is

ter 5.

(VTEC) solenoid valve

all

(OBD-II) systems, the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can

sive, but relatively

For more information about the ignition coils, see Chap-

off.

II

only be accessed with a scan tool. Professional scan tools are expen-

over the

of the valve cover, directly

Instead, "coil drivers" inside the

on and

32 On these models, nostic

spark plugs. The ignition coils are under the control of the Powertrain Control

Accessing the DTCs

to over-

of the throttle body.

coils are located directly

6-5

good tune-

2.32 The Data Link Connector (DLC)

is

located under the

dash, to the right of the steering column

6-6 QBD-II

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS TROUBLE CODES

—Note: Not

all

trouble codes apply to

all

models.

Code

Probable cause

P0010

Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC)

P0011

Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC) system malfunction

P0107

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor

circuit,

low voltage

P0108

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor

circuit,

high voltage

P0112

Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor circuit, low voltage

P0113

Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor circuit, high voltage

P0116

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor range/performance problem

P0117

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor

circuit,

low voltage

P0118

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor

circuit,

high voltage

P0122

Throttle Position (TP) sensor circuit, low voltage

P0123

Throttle Position (TP) sensor circuit, high voltage

P0125

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor, slow response

P0128

Cooling system malfunction

P0131

Upstream oxygen sensor

circuit,

low voltage

P0132

Upstream oxygen sensor

circuit,

high voltage

P0133

Upstream oxygen sensor

circuit,

slow response

P0133

Air/Fuel (A/F) ratio sensor circuit, slow response

P0134

Air/Fuel (A/F) ratio sensor circuit, no activity detected

P0135

Upstream oxygen sensor, heater

P0135

Air/Fuel (A/F) ratio sensor, heater circuit malfunction

P0137

Downstream oxygen sensor

circuit,

low voltage

P0138

Downstream oxygen sensor

circuit,

high voltage

P0139

Downstream oxygen sensor

circuit,

slow response

P0141

Downstream oxygen

P0143

Third oxygen sensor circuit, low voltage

P0144

Third oxygen sensor circuit, high voltage

P0145

Third oxygen sensor circuit, slow response

P0147

Third oxygen sensor, heater circuit malfunction

P0171

Fuel system too lean

P0172

Fuel system too rich

P0300

Random

P0301

Cylinder no.

control solenoid valve malfunction

circuit malfunction

sensor, heater circuit malfunction

misfire detected

1

oil

misfire-detected

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS Code

Probable cause

P0302

Cylinder no. 2 misfire detected

P0303

Cylinder no. 3 misfire detected

P0304

Cylinder no. 4 misfire detected

P0325

Knock sensor

P0335

Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor

circuit,

P0336

Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor

circuit, intermittent interruption

P0339

Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor

circuit, intermittent interruption

P0340

Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, no signal

P0340

Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor A, no signal

P0341

Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC) phase gap

P0344

Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor,

P0344

Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor

A, intermittent interruption

P0365

Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor

B,

P0369

Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor

B, intermittent interruption

P0401

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system, insufficient flow

P0404

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve, insufficient

P0406

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve position sensor

P0420

Catalyst system efficiency below threshold

P0451

Fuel tank pressure sensor, range or performance problem

P0452

Fuel tank pressure sensor circuit, low voltage

P0453

Fuel tank pressure sensor circuit, high voltage

P0497

Evaporative Emission (EVAP) system, low purge flow

P0500

Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS), circuit malfunction

P0501

Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS), range or performance problem

P0502

Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS), no signal

P0505

Idle control

system malfunction

P0506

Idle control

system, rpm lower than expected

P0507

Idle control

system, rpm higher than expected

P0511

Idle Air

P0563

Powertrain Control Module

P0600

Serial

P0607

Powertrain Control Module

P0630

VIN not programmed, or mismatched

P0661

Intake Manifold

Runner Control (IMRC) valve position sensor

circuit,

low voltage

P0662

Intake Manifold

Runner Control (IMRC) valve position sensor

circuit,

high voltage

circuit

malfunction

no signal

intermittent interruption

no signal

lift

circuit,

high voltage

Control (IAC) valve, circuit malfunction

communication

link

(PCM) power source

circuit,

unexpected voltage

malfunction

(PCM)

internal circuit malfunction

6-7

7 5

6-8

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

Automatic transmission diagnostic trouble codes Code

Probable cause

P0705

Transmission Range (TR) switch, multiple

P0706

Transmission Range (TR) switch, open

P0710

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) temperature sensor

P071

Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor

P0716

Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, range or performance problem

P071

Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, no signal input

P0720

Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor

P0721

Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, range or performance problem

P0722

Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, no signal input

P0730

Shift control

P0740

Lock-up control system

P0741

Lock-up control system

P0745

Mechanical problem

P0748

Automatic transmission clutch pressure control solenoid valve

P0750

Mechanical problem

P0753

Shift control solenoid valve

A

P0758

Shift control solenoid valve

B

P0778

Automatic transmission clutch pressure control solenoid valve B

P0780

Mechanical problem

in

hydraulic system

P0795

Mechanical problem

in

hydraulic system

P0798

Automatic transmission clutch pressure control solenoid valve C

P0840

2nd clutch transmission

P0845

3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch

P0962

Clutch pressure control solenoid valve A, short or open circuit

P0963

Clutch pressure control solenoid valve

P0966

Clutch pressure control solenoid valve B

P0967

Clutch pressure control solenoid valve

P0973

Shift solenoid valve A, short circuit

P0974

Shift solenoid valve A,

P0976

Shift solenoid valve B, short circuit

P0977

Shift solenoid valve B,

shift position input

circuit

system

hydraulic system

in

A

hydraulic system

in

fluid

open

open

pressure switch

circuit

circuit

A

C

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor

3

I Refer to illustrations 3.2

-

replacement

and 3.4

remove the 5

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see

1

Chapter

5,

Section

sensor

3

Remove

the upper timing belt cover (see Chapter 2A).

4

Remove

the

electrical

connector (see

sensor mounting bolts (see

3.2 To disconnect the this

sensor.

Be sure

CMP

to tighten the

listed in this Chapter's Specifica-

tions.

CMP

Disconnect the

remove

CMP

Installation is the reverse of removal.

sensor mounting bolts to the torque

1).

2

CMP

6-9

CMP

illustration).

illustration)

6

When

you're done, reconnect the cable to the negative battery

terminal and perform the

and

sensor electrical connector,

Section

3.4 To detach the

rubber grommet from the timing belt cover

PCM

idle learn

procedure (see Chapter

5,

1).

remove

this

CMP

mounting

sensor from the cylinder head,

bolt

(coupe and sedan)

(coupe and sedan)

Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor

4

I Refer to illustrations 4.3

-

replacement

and 4.5

5

Remove

CKP

the

sensor mounting bolt (see

illustration)

and

remove the CKP sensor. 1

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see 6

Chapter

5,

Section

1).

2

Raise the front of the vehicle and place

3

Disconnect the

4

Remove

Installation is the reverse of removal.

sensor mounting bolt

CKP

sensor

electrical

it

securely on jackstands.

connector (see

7

When

you're

Be sure

to tighten the

CKP

to the torque listed in this Chapter's Specifications.

done reconnect the cable

to the negative battery ter-

illustration).

the timing belt cover and the timing belt (see Chapter

minal (see Chapter

5,

Section

1).

2A

or 2B).

4.3 The

end

CKP sensor

electrical connector is located at the left

of the engine,

behind the lower timing belt cover, near the crankshaft. To release the connector, depress this tab and pull off the

connector

4.5 To detach the

mounting

bolt.

that the rubber

CKP sensor from

When

installing the

weather seal

is

the engine,

remove

CKP

make sure

sensor,

this

correctly seated to prevent

moisture from entering the timing belt area

.

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

6-10 5

Load Detector (ELD)

Electrical

unit

-

replacement

t Refer to illustrations 5.3, 5.5a, 5.5b, 5.5c, 5.6 and 5.7

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see

1

Chapter

5,

Section

Remove

2

1).

the cover from the engine

box (see Chapter 12 3

Locate the

4

Remove

amp

ELD

compartment fuse and

relay

necessary).

if

(see illustration)

in

the fuse

the mounting screws for the

and

80-amp

relay box.

fuse and the 40-

fuse (see illustration 5.3), then remove both fuses and their con-

tact bars.

ELD cannot be removed

(The

two fuses are out

until the

Detach the fuse and relay box from

5

illustration), turn

contact bars for the

of the way.)

it

its

mounting brackets (see

over and remove the cover from the underside of

the box (see illustrations).

Locate the electrical connector for the

6

ELD and disconnect

it

(see

illustration).

7

8 clean

5.3 The Electrical Load Detector (ELD) unit

Remove

the

Remove

the contact plate from the ELD, inspect

it

off

ELD

(see illustration).

as necessary, then

install

it

in

contact plate must be oriented exactly the

ELD.

It

won't

fit

into the fuse

is

located inside

compartment fuse and relay box, between the 80amp and 40-amp fuses, both of which must be removed before you can remove the ELD

the engine

the

same way

and relay box

if

it

for corrosion,

new ELD. Note

it's

it

was

that the

in

the old

incorrectly oriented.

1

80-amp

fuse

2

40-amp

fuse

3

ELDunif

5.5b To remove the cover from the underside of the fuse and 5.5a To detach the engine compartment fuse and relay box, pry loose the retaining clips

relay box, carefully pry

blade screwdriver

.

it

loose at these six spots with a

.

5.6 To disconnect the electrical connector from the ELD,

depress this locking tab with a screwdriver and unplug 5.5c

and remove the cover

the connector

flat

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

Installation is the reverse of removal.

9

negative battery terminal and perform the (see Chapter 5, Section

5.7 Carefully remove the

ELD from

6-11

Reconnect the cable

PCM

idle learn

to the

procedure

1).

the fuse and relay box,

then remove the contact bar from the ELD and inspect

it

for

corrosion (before removing the contact plate from the old

ELD, note how

oriented in relation to the

it's

fuse box and be sure to install in

the

new

it

exactly the

ELD and

to the

same way

unit)

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor

6

I Refer to illustrations 6.1, 6.3

replacement

-

and 6.5

##

*# WARNING:

If

CAUTION:

you're planning to reuse the old ECT sensor, handle

Damage

care.

Wait until the engine has cooled completely before beginning procedure.

tion of the

to the

ECT sensor

will

it with adversely affect the opera-

PGM-FI system.

this

1

The ECT sensor

is

located at the right end of the cylinder head

on coupes and sedans and

Vs and hatchbacks (see 2

at the left

end

of the cylinder

Drain the engine coolant (see Chapter

1 ). (If

you don't drain the

some coolant will run out when you remove install the new sensor as quickly as possible.)

3

Disconnect the

electrical

the

ECT

sensor,

Remove and

5

discard the old

Whether you're planning unit,

illustration).

coolant,

so

head on CR-

ECT sensor

to reuse the old

O-ring (see illustration).

ECT sensor

or install a

new

be sure to use a new O-ring.

6

Installation is the reverse of removal.

Be sure

to tighten the

ECT

sensor securely. 7

Refill

the cooling system (see Chapter 1).

connector from the ECT sensor (see

illustration).

4

Unscrew the ECT sensor.

The ECT sensor is located at the end of the cylinder head on coupes and sedans (shown) and on the left end of the cylinder head on CR-Vs and hatchbacks 6.1

6.3 To disconnect the electrical

6.5 Be sure to remove and discard

right

connector from the ECT sensor,

the old O-ring from the

depress this locking tab and

always use a new O-ring when

pull straight

up

installing the

ECT sensor;

ECT sensor

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

6-12

Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor

I

replacement

-

Refer to illustrations 7.1, 7.4, 7.6 and 7.7

Remove

5

tion 7.4)

••Note: This section applies only to models with an automatic transaxle.

special spacer

Locate the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (see illustration)

1

on the

front side of the transaxle

on coupes and sedans, or on the

backside of the transaxle on CR-Vs and hatchbacks.

2 filter

On coupes and sedans remove housing

-

removal and

remove the

do

8 and,

not absolutely necessary to

On CR-Vs and hatchbacks,

raise the vehicle

on jackstands, then remove the splash shield,

if

and place

it

securely

equipped, from under-

Disconnect the

sensor (see

electrical

connector from the input shaft speed

(not a

bolt (see illustra-

BMXA

(If

BMXA)

remove the and

you don't know whether your vehicle has an

transaxle, look at the tag

on top

of the transaxle.)

discard the sensor O-ring (see illustration).

you're installing the sensor on an

install

transaxle,

shaft sensor (see illustration)

Be sure

Installation is the reverse of removal. if

SLXA

to

use a new O-ring

transaxle,

make sure

the special spacer washer, then tighten the sensor

mounting

bolt to the torque listed in this Chapter's Specifications. If

you're servicing a

coupe

or sedan, install the battery tray

removed) and the battery (see Chapter 5) and the (see Air

10

neath the engine/transaxle assembly.

4

you

for reassembly.

or a

SLXA

with an

washer from the input

Remove and

9

so.)

3

SLXA

Chapter 4) and remove the

it's

it

7

more working room, you might want

battery tray as well, but

save

the air intake resonator (see Air

installation in

battery (see Chapter 5). (For even to

On models

6

mounting

the input shaft speed sensor

and remove the sensor.

If

filter

housing

-

removal and

you're servicing a

CR-V

air intake

installation in

Chapter

(if

resonator 4).

or a hatchback, lower the vehicle

when

you're done.

illustration).

7.4 To remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor,

The input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor is located on the front of the transaxle on coupes and sedans (shown) or on the backside of the transaxle on CR-Vs and hatchbacks 7.1

7.6 On models with an

SLXA

(not a

(1),

remove the mounting bolt (2), remove the sensor and, on SLXA transaxles, remove and bag the special spacer washer (3)

BMXA) automatic

transaxle, the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor uses a

special spacer washer that you'll need

sensor again

depress the tab and disconnect the electrical connector

when

installing the

7.7 Be sure to remove and discard the old O-ring from the input shaft sensor; even

if

you plan

to

shaft speed sensor, be sure to use a

reuse the old input

new

O-ring

J

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor

8

»

-

replacement

Refer to illustrations 8.1 and 8.4 1

Locate the IAT sensor (see illustration), which

of the air filter

duct on

2

is

on the

housing on coupes and sedans and on the

left

end

air intake

CR-Vs and hatchbacks.

Disconnect the

electrical

3

Pull the IAT

4

Remove

inspect

left

9

of the air filter

Knock sensor

for cracks, tears

or worn, replace

its

mounting grommet.

mounting grommet (see

and other

deterioration.

If

illustration)

the

grommet

and

is

it.

connector from the IAT sensor.

the IAT sensor

is

located on the

Remove

inspect

it

grommet

housing

-

sensor out of

the IAT sensor

Installation is the reverse of removal.

5

On coupes and sedans, end

it

damaged

8.4 8.1

6-13

the old IAT sensor mounting

for cracks, tears is

damaged

grommet and

and other deterioration;

or worn, replace

if

the

it

replacement

I Refer to illustrations 9.4 and 9.5

Disconnect the knock sensor

4

electrical

connector (see

illustra-

tion). 1

Locate the knock sensor, which

is

located on the backside of the

engine block on coupes and sedans, and on the front side of the block

5

On SOHC

engines, remove the knock sensor retaining bolt and

detach the sensor (see

illustration).

On DOHC

engines, unscrew the

on CR-Vs and hatchbacks. sensor.

2

Raise the vehicle and place

3

Remove

it

securely on jackstands.

the under-engine splash shield,

if

6

equipped (see Chap-

Installation is the reverse of removal.

knock sensor retaining bolt or sensor

ter 2). ter's

to tighten the

Chap-

Specifications.

9.4 To disconnect the knock sensor electrical connector (A),

9.5 Knock sensor retaining bolt

depress this release button (B) with your finger or with a blade screwdriver (coupe/sedan shown)

(coupe/sedan shown)

flat-

Be sure

to the torque listed in this

(oil filter

removed

for clarity)

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

6-14

10 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor

-

replacement

I Refer to illustration 10.2 1

Remove

2

Disconnect the

the air

housing (see Chapter

filter

connector from the

electrical

Q.

4).

MAP

V^HE^M^M*^

sensor (see

illustration).

4

MAP sensor retaining screw (see illustration MAP sensor. Remove the old MAP sensor O-ring and discard

5

Installation is the reverse of removal.

3

Remove

the

9

10.2)

and remove the

it.

and tighten the

MAP

Be sure

use a new O-ring

to

sensor mounting screw securely.

1

A

10.2 To remove the

MAP

sensor, disconnect the electrical

connector (1) by depressing the release tab (2), then remove the sensor mounting screw (3). After removing the MAP sensor, be sure to

remove and discard the

use a new O-ring when installing the

Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor

11

-

MAP

old O-ring; always

sensor

replacement

I Refer to illustration 11.3

—Note: This procedure applies only

to

models with an auto11.3 Output shaft

matic transaxle.

transaxle, near the transaxle fluid level dipstick,

or

(countershaft) speed

Locate the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor on top of the

1

on the backside 2

of the transaxle

air intake

installation in

resonator (see Air

Chapter

4).

remove any splash

shield,

Disconnect the

tershaft)

if

it

filter

coupe

housing

-

or sedan,

removal and

1

that's in the

Electrical

2

connector

Tab (depress to release connector)

securely on jackstands, then

equipped,

3

way.

Mounting bolt

connector from the output shaft (coun-

electrical

speed sensor (see

Remove

4

details (coupe/sedan shown, CR-V similar)

you're replacing the output shaft sensor on

If

a CR-V, raise the vehicle and place

3

on coupes and sedans,

on CR-Vs.

you're replacing the output shaft sensor on a

If

remove the

sensor mounting

illustration).

the output shaft sensor

mounting

bolt

and remove the

sensor.

5

Remove and

6

Installation is the reverse of removal.

discard the sensor O-ring (see illustration 7.7).

12 Oxygen sensors i— Note: Because

it

is

-

Be sure

to

use a new

O-ring and tighten the sensor mounting bolt to the torque listed

replacement

installed in the exhaust manifold or pipe,

when cool, an oxygen sensor might be loosen when the engine is cold. Rather than risk

trical

both of which contract very difficult to

damage

sensor or its mounting threads, start and run the engine for a minute or two, then shut it off. Be careful not to burn yourself during the following procedure.

2 a)

b) Keep grease, did

it

securely on jackstands.

Special care must be taken whenever a sensor

serviced.

Oxygen sensors have a permanently attached pigtail and an

Do

d)

Oxygen sensors are extremely throw

it

around or handle

Make sure

it

the silicone boot

delicate.

Do

not drop a sensor,

roughly

on the sensor

rect position. Otherwise, the boot

elec-

the electrical

not use cleaning solvents of any kind on an oxygen sensor.

c)

e) is

and other contaminants away from

connector and the louvered end of the sensor.

the key from the ignition key lock cylinder. Raise the

vehicle and place

connector that cannot be removed. Damaging or removing

the pigtail or electrical connector will render the sensor useless.

to the

Remove

1

in this

Chapter's Specifications.

is installed in the

might melt and

the sensor from operating correctly

it

cor-

might prevent

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

12.4

If

you're removing the upstream oxygen sensor on a

12.10

If

6-15

you're removing the downstream oxygen sensor on

coupe or sedan with a D17A1 (non-VTEC) or a D17A6 (VTEC)

a coupe or sedan with a

engine, disconnect the electrical connector (1) and unscrew

(VTEC) engine, you'll find the sensor right above the exhaust manifold-to-exhaust pipe flange. The downstream oxygen

the sensor (2).

If

you're removing the downstream oxygen

sensor, disconnect the electrical connector (3) for that sensor

upstream sensor

(the

D17A2 engine

for a

located just

is

sensor

D17A1 (non-VTEC)

D17A2 VTEC engine

of a

or a

D17A6

the rear end of the

is at

catalytic converter

below the exhaust manifold-to-exhaust pipe flange)

Downstream oxygen sensor

COUPE AND SEDAN

I Refer to illustration 12.10

On coupes and sedans

3

are two

with

oxygen sensors. The upstream oxygen sensor

by Honda as the "Air/Fuel (A/F) converter (which

alytic

and sedans with

(D17A2 engines)

VTEC

ratio

- is

sensor"

is

catalyst,

do not use the

which

is

are located

ahead

located underneath the vehicle (these

exhaust manifold/catalyst assembly).

non-VTEC models, and

oxygen sensors are

On coupes

(D17A6 engines). On VTEC

models with three oxygen sensors use the same fold/catalyst as

located above the cat-

located right below the catalyst.

or three oxygen sensors

integral

also referred to

engines, there are either two oxygen sensors

models with two oxygen sensors, the sensors on the

-

there

an integral part of the exhaust manifold) and

is

downstream sensor

the

non-VTEC (D1 7A1 ) engines,

installed at the

their

same

integral

of

and

models

the

oxygen sensor, which

same

location,

i.e.

is

exhaust mani-

upstream and downstream

locations as the upstream and

located at the second catalyst, which

underneath the vehicle, as the catalyst on

Disconnect the

9

Raise the front of the vehicle and place

electrical

connector (see

10 Locate the upstream oxygen sensor exhaust manifold (see

Remove

1

the

at the

downstream oxygen sensor from

12

If

pound

VTEC

Upstream oxygen sensor

going to

threads of the sensor to a

install

compound

new oxygen

sensor,

facilitate future it's

13

If

pound going seize

connector (see

7

the upstream

to the threads of the to install a

The threads on new sensors already

to the threads.

Be sure

to tighten the

oxy-

to the torque listed in this Chapter's Specifications.

14 Raise the vehicle and place

seize

18

oxygen sensor.

compound

sensor to

new oxygen

sensor,

to the threads.

facilitate future it's

removal.

comIf

it

securely on jackstands. electrical connector.

If

catalytic converter.

you're going to install the old sensor, apply anti-seize

to the

threads of the sensor to a

install

compound

new oxygen

sensor,

to the threads.

facilitate future it's

removal.

comIf

you're

not necessary to apply anti-

The threads on new sensors already

Be sure

to tighten the

oxy-

to the torque listed in this Chapter's Specifications.

CR-V AND HATCHBACK

The threads on new sensors already

compound on them. to the

Installation is the reverse of removal.

gen sensor

you're

not necessary to apply anti-

Installation is the reverse of removal.

upstream oxygen sensor tions.

you're

have anti-seize compound on them.

you're going to install the old sensor, apply anti-seize

have anti-seize

If

Third oxygen sensor (D17A6 engine only)

pound

illustration).

Remove

com-

not necessary to apply anti-

Installation is the reverse of removal.

gen sensor

going to

6

removal.

have anti-seize compound on them.

17

I Refer to illustration 12.4

5

the exhaust mani-

you're going to install the old sensor, apply anti-seize

to the

16 Unscrew the oxygen sensor from the

electrical

lower end of the

illustration).

15 Disconnect the oxygen sensor

Disconnect the upstream oxygen sensor

securely on jackstands.

is in

models with only two sensors.

4

illustration 12.4).

it

fold.

seize

VTEC

downstream sensors on non-VTEC models. But these models have a third

8

torque listed

19 The upstream oxygen sensor Be sure in this

to tighten the

Chapter's Specifica-

"Air/Fuel (A/F) ratio sensor" alytic converter. of the catalyst.

- is

-

also referred to by

The downstream oxygen sensor

The

Honda as

the

located at the upstream end of the catis

located at the middle

catalyst is located underneath the vehicle.

6-16

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

20 Raise the vehicle and place

it

pound

securely on jackstands.

21 Disconnect the electrical connector for the upstream or

down-

stream oxygen sensor.

going seize

22 Unscrew and remove the upstream or downstream oxygen sen-

compound

24 It

you're going to install the old sensor, apply anti-seize

13 Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch I Refer to illustrations 13.3

com-

-

Installation

gen sensor

is

—Note: This procedure does not apply to hatchbacks, which are equipped with Electrical Power Steering. the air

filter

housing (see Chap-

to the

is

On CR-Vs

raise the front

end

and place

of the vehicle

it

securely

on jackstands. 3

Find the power steering pressure switch (see illustration), which

is

located on

power steering system, right above the steering rack (coupe/sedan shown, CR-V similar) the pressure line for the

located

in this

the pressure line for the

in

Be sure

The TP sensor

is

not removable.

If

it's

-

power steering system,

4

Disconnect the

5

Using a back-up wrench unscrew the

6

Installation is the reverse of removal.

7

When

you're

I Refer to illustrations 15.4, 15.5, 15.6

-

right

electrical

connector from the

in this

done lower

PSP

PSP

switch.

switch (see illustration).

Be sure

to tighten the

PSP

Chapter's Specifications.

the vehicle

and check the power if

steer-

necessary (see Chap-

ter 1).

13.5 To remove the PSP switch from the power steering pressure

line, put a

back-up wrench on the junction block to

when you loosen the switch when you install the switch too)

prevent kinking the pressure line

replacement

defective, replace the throttle

15 Transmission range switch

to tighten the oxy-

Chapter's Specifications.

rack.

(use the back-up wrench

14 Throttle Position (TP) sensor

you're

The threads on new sensors already

ing fluid level, adding fluid of the proper type

13.3 The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch

If

not necessary to apply anti-

the reverse of removal.

torque listed

switch to the torque listed

ter 4).

2

it's

replacement

and 13.5

On coupes and sedans, remove

to facilitate future removal.

sensor,

to the threads.

above the steering

1

sensor

new oxygen

have anti-seize compound on them.

sor.

23

to the threads of the to install a

body (see Chapter

4).

replacement and adjustment

and 15.8

well (coupes

and sedans) or from the

left

front

wheel well (CR-Vs) (see

Chapter 11). 1

wheel.

On coupes and sedans, loosen the On CR-Vs, loosen the lug nuts for

vehicle and place

it

lug nuts for the right front the

left

front wheel. Raise the

'

Remove

Put the shift lever inside the vehicle

4

Remove

in the

Neutral position.

the cover from the transmission range switch (see illus-

securely on jackstands, then remove the right front

wheel (coupes and sedans) or the 2

3

left

front

wheel (CR-Vs).

the inner fender splash shield from the right front wheel

tration).

5

Disconnect the

electrical

connector from the transmission range

switch (see illustration).

J

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

6-17

15.4 To detach the transmission range switch cover, remove

15.5 To disconnect the electrical connector from the

these two bolts (coupe/sedan shown, CR-Vs similar)

transmission range switch, depress the locking tab (A) and pull off the connector; to

6

Remove

tration 15.5)

detach the transmission range

switch from the transaxle, remove the two bolts (B)

the transmission range switch mounting bolts (see illus-

(coupe/sedan shown, CR-Vs similar)

and remove the switch.

switch mounting bolts. Then use a long, thin

CAUTION:

drill bit

or a metal rod to

align the control shaft with the rotary frame (see illustration)

While the transmission range switch is removed, do the control shaft (see illustration) on the transaxle.

NOT

rotate

them together while you

tighten the switch

Before installing the transmission range switch,

the switch

is in

make sure

the Neutral position. (You'll hear/feel a click

put the switch into Neutral.) Also

make sure

that

when you

the Neutral position (see illustration 15.6) before installing the trans-

direction until

position. Rotate

which 8

is

stops.

it

it

As you

rotate the shaft,

it

in

a clockwise

clicks into each gear

counterclockwise to the third position (third

click),

9

The remainder

10

When

lever is

transmission range switch and loosely

install

the

move

the transmission range switch

of installation is the reverse of removal.

you're done, turn the ignition switch to ON,

through

all

move

the shift

the gears and verify that the transmission range switch

correctly synchronized with the gear position indicator on the instru-

ment

cluster.

Then

verify that the

tion other than Park or Neutral,

when

Neutral.

Install the

to lock

while tightening the switch mounting bolts.

that the control shaft is in

mission range switch. To do so, rotate the control shaft

and

to the torque

listed in this Chapter's Specifications.

••Note: Be careful not to 7

mounting bolts

the shift lever

meet any

is in

engine

and

NOT

will

that the

the Reverse position.

of these criteria, readjust the

start in

back-up If

any gear posi-

lights

come on

the vehicle fails to

transmission range switch.

15.6 Once you have removed the transmission range switch from the transaxle, do NOT move the control shaft from the

the slot in the control shaft with the cutouts in the rotary

Neutral position (shown)

frame and the switch housing

15.8

When

installing the transmission

range switch, align

.

6-18

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

16 Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)

-

replacement

I Refer to illustration 16.2

1

On coupes, sedans and hatchbacks, remove

onator (see Air

filter

On CR-Vs, remove

housing

the air

VSS on

-

filter

removal and

housing (see Chapter

Chapter

4).

Locate the

3

Disconnect the

4

Remove

5

Installation is the reverse of removal.

electrical

bolt

is

located on top of the rear part of the

connector from the VSS.

VSS mounting

VSS

16.2 The

4).

top of the transaxle (see illustration).

2

the

the air intake res-

installation in

transaxle, right above

and remove the VSS.

the differential, where

CV

the inner

connected

joints are

to the

transaxle (coupe/sedan

shown, CR-V and hatchback similar)

17 Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

-

removal and installation dealership service department before the engine will

WARNING:

dealer will need the vehicle, the

models covered by this manual are equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), more commonly known as airbags. Always disarm the airbag system before working in the vicinity of any airbag system component to avoid the possibility of accidental deployment of the airbag, which could cause personal injury (see Chapter 12). All

vehicle keys to program the

ning to replace the old

removal and installation. If available, ground yourself to the vehicle with a anti-static ground strap, available at computer supply stores. ing

new PCM unit. So with a new unit, a

if

start.

all of

The

the

you're plan-

dealer service

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see

1

To avoid electrostatic discharge damage to the PCM, handle the PCM only by its case. Do not touch the electrical terminals dur-

and

unit

department must perform the following procedure (unless you want to have the vehicle towed to the dealer after you have installed the new PCM!).

Chapter

* CAUTION:

PCM

new PCM

5,

Section

1).

2

Disable the airbag system (see Chapter

3

On coupes, sedans and hatchbacks, remove

1 2).

the passenger's

dashboard lower cover (see Dashboard trim panels installation in

same

section

Chapter 11). On in

all

-

removal and

models, remove the glove box (see

Chapter 11).

COUPE, SEDAN AND CR-V —Note: The PCM

is

a

component

of the

"immobilizer" (vehicle

new PCM is installed in the vehicle, the immobilizer code must be programmed into the new PCM by a

security) system.

If

I Refer to illustration 17.4, 17.5a, 17.5b, 17.6, 17.7

and 17.8

a

4 that

On coupes and sedans,

cut off

and unbolt the section

covers up the glove box frame (see

illustration).

17.4 On coupes and sedans, cut off this piece of plastic where indicated, remove the single retaining bolt and

17.5a On coupes and sedans, unbolt and remove the

discard the plastic

glove box frame

.

.

of plastic

(The manufacturer

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

17.5b

.

.

.

covering it

after

it,

17.6 Detach this big electrical connector from the

depress the relay release tabs, detach the relays

from the frame and set the frame

aside (unlike the plastic that

it

is structural,

so you will need to

was install

you have replaced the PCM)

2

A

PGM-FI main

relay No.

B

PGM-FI main

relay No. 1

6-19

PCM

mounting bracket by squeezing the two release tabs together (into the locator pin) and pushing the locator pin from the bracket

C

Automatic transmission

CAUTION:

reverse relay

damage to the computer by groundbody before touching the PCM and using a pad to store the PCM on once it is removed.

Avoid any static electricity leaves this piece of plastic intact

when

the dash

is

not structural, so you're not weakening the dash

On coupes and sedans, unbolt

5 tion),

detach the relays from

(Unlike the plastic piece that

you

will

6

have to

install

it

it

assembled, but

when you remove

ing yourself to the

it's

it.)

special anti-static

the glove box frame (see illustra-

(see illustration)

was covering

it,

and remove the frame.

this

again after replacing the

Detach the big electrical connector from the

frame

is structural,

so

PCM.)

PCM

9

Installation is the reverse of removal.

10

When

you're done, reconnect the cable to the negative battery ter-

minal and perform the

mounting

PCM

idle learn

procedure (see Chapter

5,

Sec-

tion 1).

bracket (see illustration).

7

Disconnect the

electrical

connectors from the

PCM

(see illustra-

HATCHBACK

tion).

8

Remove

illustration)

the

PCM

mounting

bolt

and the two mounting nuts (see

and remove the PCM.

1

Disconnect the

electrical

12 Remove the three 13

PCM

mounting bolts and remove the PCM.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

PCM

17.7 Disconnect the four electrical connectors from the

17.8 To detach the

PCM

remove these fasteners

(coupe/sedan shown; CR-V similar)

connectors from the underside of the

PCM.

from a coupe, sedan or CR-V,

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

6-20 18

Idle Air Control (IAC) valve

I Refer to illustrations 18.4

replacement

-

and 18.5

is

on the

front side of the throttle body,

body

the throttle

WARNING: Wait

until the

in

hatchbacks, the IAC valve

engine

completely cool before beginning this

is

so

not necessary to remove

it's

order to remove the IAC valve.

body, so you must

first

the IAC valve from

it.)

On CR-Vs and

mounted on the underside

is

remove the

throttle

of the throttle

body before you can remove

procedure. 4

Remove

the IAC valve

remove the IAC 1

Remove

2

Clamp

the air

off

filter

housing (see Chapter

hoses from the valve. Be prepared

for a

little

intake manifold (see Chapter 4).

5

Remove

6

When

illustration)

the old IAC valve gasket (see illustration)

installing the

and

and discard

it.

IAC valve, be sure to use a new gasket and

coolant spillage.

mounting screws securely.

tighten the IAC valve

On CR-Vs and hatchbacks, remove

3

4).

the coolant hoses to the IAC valve, then detach the

mounting screws (see

valve.

the throttle

body from the 7

Installation is otherwise the reverse of removal.

8

Check the coolant

(On coupes and sedans, the IAC valve

level

and add some,

necessary, to bring

if

it

to

the appropriate level (see Chapter 1).

18.4 IAC valve mounting screws (coupe/sedan shown,

CR-V and hatchback IAC valve on the underside

similar, except that

of the throttle

it's

18.5 After removing the IAC valve from the throttle body,

body and has two screws

remove

instead of three)

19 Intake Manifold Runner Control (IMRC) system

-

this gasket

description and

economy and The

1

Runner Control (IMRC) system, which

Intake Manifold

CR-V

engines, produces improved torque at

all

used

is

engine speeds.

It

achieves this by rotating a barrel-shaped valve located inside the intake

manifold assembly.

When

are lengthened and there

valve

is

the valve

is

is

closed, the intake manifold runners

more torque

at

engine speeds. Here's why:

When

low engine speeds, less

intake air air is

is

air

drawn

into

is

drawn

more torque

the

high

at

into the cylinders at

needed because the cylinders

don't need to be filled so often or so quickly.

speeds, the

When

low engine speeds.

open, the runners are shortened and there

idle or at

So

at idle

and

at

low engine

an engine with longer intake runners

will

have

3

The IMRC system consists

tion

enough and would

therefore limit power.

Most

intake

mani-

uum diaphragm the engine

2

The Intake Manifold Runner Control (IMRC) system helps

maintain a uniformly higher intake

air velocity

to

throughout the engine's

operating range. Higher intake air velocity promotes better vaporization of the fuel

sprayed into the stream

of

incoming

air

by the

fuel injectors,

a PCM-controlled sole-

vacuum

is

The actuator

is

a vac-

that rotates the barrel valve inside the manifold.

When

signal to the actuator.

idling or operating

through the solenoid valve

is

below 4300 rpm the vacuum path

closed.

When

the

vacuum

is

incoming

through a longer path. Directing incoming

air

PCM

it

fill

air

the cylinders.

When

engine speed reaches 4300

When

the

diaphragm inside the actuator

it

sends the incoming

air

path designed to handle a larger volume of of air

air

can move more quickly through the

turns the barrel valve inside the intake manifold.

barrel valve turns,

ume

through a

energizes the solenoid valve, which allows intake vac-

to reach the actuator.

moves,

air

low engine speeds promotes higher intake

at

because the incoming

intake manifold to

rpm, the

path through

closed, the barrel valve inside the manifold directs

the solenoid

uum

and high engine speeds.

PCM,

sensor mounted on the actuator. The PCM-controlled solenoid

valve controls the

velocities

quickly

of the

vacuum-controlled actuator mounted on the manifold and a valve posi-

engine speeds, longer intake runners would prevent the cylinders from

designs are a compromise between the conflicting demands of low

better fuel

noid valve, a special intake manifold with a barrel-type valve inside, a

a higher velocity than one with shorter intake runners. However, at higher

fold

component replacement

less emissions.

longer intake path

filling

it

which means more complete combustion, more power,

DESCRIPTION

only on

and replace

drawn

When

the

through a shorter intake air.

At that point, the vol-

into the cylinders is sufficient to

promote good veloc-

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS ity

even through the shorter intake path. And the shorter intake path

speeds. The

PCM

monitors the position (angle) of the barrel valve with

a valve position sensor, which

a "potentiometer" (three-terminal vari-

is

able resistor with an adjustable center connection)

IMRC

of the

actuator.

rel-valve shaft.

As

The valve position sensor

is

When

8

IMRC

valve

aligned with the groove

is

that the in

the sen-

sor.

Installation is otherwise the reverse of removal.

9

IMRC

Be sure

to tighten

valve position sensor mounting screws to the torque listed

mounted on the side

the

connected

this Chapter's Specifications.

to the bar-

make sure

installing the valve position sensor,

projection inside the

enhances performance during heavy acceleration or high cruising

6-21

in

the position of the valve changes, the valve position

sensor varies the signal voltage to the

IMRC

PCM.

actuator/valve assembly

10 Remove the intake manifold (see Chapter 2B).

COMPONENT REPLACEMENT

Remove

11

IMRC valve

Disconnect the

connector from the

electrical

IMRC

valve position

sensor.

5

When

the two valve position sensor

mounting screws and

Remove and

7

Install

a

new

assembly mounting bolts

-

engines. The second catalyst

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CHECK

A

catalytic converter (or catalyst) is

the vehicle.

to tighten

in

the exhaust pipe, underneath

a single catalyst

in

all

the exhaust pipe

underneath the vehicle.

an emission control device

The

6

test

equipment

analyzer)

the converter

reduction converters.

authorized emission inspection

Oxidation converters contain a "monolithic substrate" (a ceramic palla-

on your vehicle

Whenever you

7

"loaded-mode"

for a catalytic converter (a

dynamometer and a 5-gas

stream. There are two types of converters: oxidation converters and

honeycomb) coated with the semi-precious metals platinum and

located

is

Coupes and sedans with a VTEC (D17A2) engine and

CR-Vs and hatchbacks have

the exhaust system that reduces certain pollutants in the exhaust gas

2

Be sure

to the torque listed in this

general description, check and replacement

•Note: Because of a Federally mandated extended warranty which covers emissions-related components like the catalytic converter, check with a dealer service department before replacing the converter at your own expense.

1

assembly, make sure that

installing the actuator/valve

Chapter's Specifications.

20 Catalytic converter

in

O-rings.

make sure

is visible.

the actuator/valve

O-ring.

new

install

actuator/valve assembly,

Installation is otherwise the reverse of removal.

16 discard the old sensor O-ring.

IMRC

that the pilot bearing is in place.

the hole

remove the sensor. 6

actuator/valve assembly mounting bolts.

actuator/valve assembly.

installing the

15 Also, when

Remove

IMRC

13 Remove and discard the old O-rings and

position sensor

14 4

IMRC

the three

12 Remove the

expensive.

is

you suspect

malfunctioning, take

is

facility for

assembly

that

to a dealer or

it

diagnosis and

raise the vehicle to service

nents, inspect the converter

If

repair.

underbody compo-

for leaks, corrosion,

dents and

dium. An oxidation catalyst reduces unburned hydrocarbons (HC) and

other damage. Carefully inspect the welds and/or flange bolts and nuts

carbon monoxide (CO) by adding oxygen to the exhaust stream as

that attach the front

passes through the substrate, which ture

in

it

the presence ot high tempera-

and the catalyst materials converts the

HC and CO

tem.

vapor

to water

Reduction converters contain a monolithic substrate coated with

platinum and rhodium.

A

reduction catalyst reduces oxides of nitrogen

(NOx) by removing oxygen, which

Although

8

in

the presence of high temperature

a)

ot catalysts in

assembly are known as "three-way catalysts" or TWCs. A reduce this

5

all

manual are equipped with three-way

On coupes and sedans

catalytic converter is

The engine codes

-

with a

,

Exhaust manifold

of the

-

remove or replace the

removal and

the

catalyst (see

and sedans with a VTEC (D17A6) engine have two identical the exhaust manifold catalyst

catalysts.

Coupes The

first

used on non-VTEC

plugged up. The easiest way use a vacuum gauge

Connect a vacuum gauge

it

will

Warm

to

to

check

diagnose the

for a

effect of

to

any

intake manifold

vacuum source

provide the necessary intake manifold vacuum).

the engine to operating temperature, place the transaxle in

Note the vacuum reading at

d)

Quickly open the throttle to near quickly get off the throttle

reading and jot

at the right

installation in Chapter 2A).

or even

the parking brake.

coupes and

machined surface located

can

catalytic converters don't break too often, they

c)

exhaust manifold.

etc. - for

exhaust sys-

Park (automatic models) or Neutral (manual models) and apply in

e)

engine block. On these models, you must remove or

replace the exhaust manifold to

is

can

non-VTEC (D1 7A1 ) engine,

D1 7A2, D17A6, flat

b)

catalysts.

an integral component

D1 7A1

sedans are stamped onto a front corner of the

catalyst

TWC

one

three pollutants. All catalysts used by the vehicles covered

of the converter to the

(any pipe on the intake manifold with a vacuum hose connected to

combine both types

ends

a blocked exhaust on intake vacuum.

(C02). Catalytic converters that

rear

restricted converter is to

and the catalyst material produces nitrogen (N) and carbon dioxide

4

and

you note any damage, replace the converter.

become clogged

(H20) and carbon dioxide (C02). 3

If

Do

this test three

each f)

If

it

and jot

idle

its

and allow

it

down.

wide-open position and then it

to close.

Note the vacuum

down.

more

times, recording

your measurement

after

test.

your fourth reading

is

more than one in-Hg lower than

reading that you noted at

idle,

the

the exhaust system might be

restricted (the catalytic converter

could be plugged,

exhaust pipe or muffler could be

restricted).

OR an

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

6-22

REPLACEMENT

12 Raise the vehicle and place

securely on jackstands.

it

13 On models with a D17A2 engine, remove the upstream and

downstream oxygen sensors (see Section

assembly

Integral exhaust manifold/catalytic converter

(coupes and sedans with D17A1 or D17A6 engines only) Remove

9

the upstream and

14 Remove the spring-loaded bolts from the

downstream oxygen sensors (see Sec-

and the nuts from the

tion 12).

15

10 Remove the exhaust manifold (see Chapter 2A). (The catalyst

is

If

with a

D17A6

remove the heat shield

shield, then install the heat shield

Installation is the reverse of removal.

16

mounting flange

catalytic converter.

damaged

and remove the heat

bolts

on the new

Installation is the reverse of removal.

rusted or

Under-vehicle catalytic converter (coupe and sedan D17A2 and D17A6 engines and all CR-Vs and

front

and remove the

rear flange

you're planning to replace (rather than just remove) the cat-

alytic converter,

an integral part of the exhaust manifold.) 11

On models

12).

engine, remove the third oxygen sensor (see Section 12).

fasteners and to tighten

unit.

Be sure

to replace

any

fasteners to the torque

all

listed in this Chapter's Specifications.

with

hatchbacks)

Evaporative Emissions Control (EVAP) system

21

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

-

general description and component replacement tank, converts fuel tank absolute pressure into a variable voltage signal

and transmits The

6

I Refer to illustration 21.2

canister, right

The Evaporative Emissions Control (EVAP) system prevents

1

fuel

system vapors (which contain unburned hydrocarbons) from escaping into the

atmosphere. On

expand

until the

warm

EVAP

canister,

operated.

the vehicle

is

up, vehicle

up

PCM

the

where

fuel tank

through the

EVAP two-way

valve to

they're stored temporarily until the next time

When

the conditions are right (engine

warmed

moderate or heavy load on the engine,

to speed,

opens the canister purge

which allows

valve,

fuel

be drawn from the canister into the intake manifold. Once

etc.)

vapors

in

below the

fuel tank

vapors inside the

valve, the valve

to the canister.

is

located at the

pressure sensor.

fuel tank

7

The

end

of the

end

EVAP

of the

the pressure

exceeds the preset value of the of

excess vapors

The two-way valve also prevents excessive vacuum

EVAP bypass solenoid valve EVAP

canister,

below the

bypass solenoid valve opens

PCM

left

When

opens and regulates the flow

the fuel tank by drawing in fresh air through the

pressure reaches a certain threshold. Then the fuel

vapors are routed from the the

days, vapors trapped inside the fuel tank

of the fuel

two-way

PCM.

this data to the

EVAP two-way valve

to

is

fuel tank

EVAP

in

canister.

also located at the

left

pressure sensor. The

bypass the two-way valve when the

does an EVAP system leak check. (The two-way valve and the

to

the intake

manifold, the fuel vapors mix with incoming air before drawn through the intake ports into the combustion

chambers where

virtually

they're

EVAP system

with the rest of the air/fuel mixture. The

is

burned up

complex and

impossible to troubleshoot without the right tools and training.

However, the following description should give you a good idea it

The

2 cle, is

how

of

works:

EVAP canister

behind the

fuel tank.

(see illustration)

The

is

located under the vehi-

which contains activated carbon,

canister,

a repository for storing fuel vapors. You'll have to raise the vehicle to

inspect or replace the canister, or any other part of the

EVAP system,

except for the canister purge valve (which

the engine

partment). But the canister

should

is

designed

last the life of the vehicle.

components located on

to

is

located

in

com-

be maintenance-free and

There are several other important

or near the canister: the air

filter,

the canister

vent shut valve, the two-way valve/bypass solenoid valve assembly and

21.2 Atypical EVAP canister installation (coupe/sedan

the fuel tank pressure sensor.

The

3 valve.

EVAP canister

When

the canister

is

filter

is

located near the canister vent shut

purged, fresh

before passing through the canister. The particles

opens

canister.

is

is

prevents dust and

from the

filter

1

dirt

rear

edge

fuel tank

normally closed, but

to enter the

EVAP

canister

it

of the

EVAP

canister,

Vent shut valve-to-air

3

Hose guides

4

EVAP canister-to-two-way

5

Two-way valve/bypass solenoid valve assembly (bypass solenoid,

on top of two-way

6 is

located behind the upper

above the EVAP bypass solenoid

valve.

pressure sensor monitors the pressure inside the fuel

Vent shut valve

2

when

being purged.

The fuel tank pressure sensor

The

is

shown, other models similar)

filter

located on the front of the

The canister vent shut valve

to allow fresh air

the canister

5

filter

drawn through the

from entering the EVAP canister and the EVAP system.

The canister vent shut valve

4

EVAP

air is

filter

valve,

hose

valve

hose

not visible in this photo)

Two-way valve-to-EVAP valve (EVAP visible in this

photo)

7

EVAP canister

8

Air

filter

valve,

on top of fuel

tank,

not

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

21.13 The EVAP canister purge valve of the throttle

located on the side

is

21 .26 To remove the

EVAP

canister air

6-23

filter:

body (coupe and sedan) Disconnect the fresh air

1

2

bypass solenoid valve are connected together and look

hose

inlet

Disconnect the outlet hose (goes

to the vent

EVAP

shut valve on the

a single

like

canister)

assembly, but they can be separated, and they're available as separate

Remove

3

the air

filter

mounting bolt

components.)

The

8

EVAP canister purge

control of the Powertrain Control

vapors being purged from the

The canister purge valve ature

is

control valve, which

EVAP

vacuum

EVAP

to the

under the

the flow of

canister into the intake manifold.

always closed when engine coolant temper-

is

below 147-degrees F (64-degrees

manifold

is

Module (PCM), regulates

Above

canister.

which cuts

C),

off intake

degrees F (70 degrees C) on coupes and sedans, 149 degrees F (65 degrees C) on CR-Vs and hatchbacks

purge valve inputs.

the

The

PCM

PCM

the

known as

its

during which the purge valve

"duty cycle." The purge valve

is

opened by

located on the

is

throttle body.

of a faulty

odor (particularly during hot weather).

EVAP system

you smell

If

fuel

is

engine, check the fuel filler

neck

filler

cap

the way.

all

hose connections, both

in

If

first.

Make

sure that

the

Coupe and sedan Refer to illustration 21.13 12 Remove the

air filter

housing (see Chapter

4).

to inspect

most

since

it

it's

securely on jackstands

of the throttle

illustration).

14 Disconnect the

electrical

connector from the purge control valve.

15 Disconnect the vacuum hoses from the purge control valve.

16 Remove the purge control valve mounting screws and remove the purge control valve.

17

EVAP

all

compartment and under the vehi-

the engine

have to raise the vehicle and place

EVAP system,

off

screwed onto

the odor persists, inspect

cle. You'll

of the

it's

a strong

while dri-

ving or (more likely) right after you park the vehicle and turn

the fuel

canister purge valve

body (see

The most common symptom

9

EVAP

13 Locate the EVAP purge control valve on the side

General system checks

fuel

COMPONENT REPLACEMENT

opens or closes the

accordance with data from various information sensor

in

interval of time

is

-

have the EVAP system pro-

to

158

-

that threshold

department or other qualified repair shop fessionally diagnosed.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

CR-V and hatchback 18 Disconnect the

electrical

connector from the

EVAP

canister purge

located under the vehicle. valve.

Be sure

to inspect

leakage along

its

the canister for

each hose attached

to the canister for

damage and

entire length. Repair or replace as necessary. Inspect

damage and

look for fuel leaking from the bottom.

19 Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP canister purge

20 Remove the EVAP

If

21 fuel is leaking or the canister is

10 Poor

idle, stalling,

otherwise damaged, replace

and poor

driveability can be

it.

EVAP

canister purge valve.

23 Using a new O-ring,

damaged cantighten the

ister,

the

22 Remove and discard the EVAP canister purge valve 0-ring.

caused by a

defective fuel vapor vent valve or canister purge valve, a

Remove

valve.

mounting screws.

canister purge valve

install the

mounting screws

EVAP

canister purge valve and

to the torque listed in this Chapter's

Speci-

cracked hoses, or hoses connected to the wrong tubes. Fuel loss fications.

or fuel odor can be

cracked or

caused by

damaged

fuel leaking

from

canister, or a defective

fuel lines or

hoses, a

11 To check for excessive fuel vapor pressure in the fuel tank,

remove the gas cap and fuel tank

listen for the

emits a "whooshing" sound

tank vapor pressure

is

sound

of

pressure release.

when you open

the

OBD-II scan tool (see Section

test 2),

will

filter

I Refer to illustration 21.26 filler

cap, fuel

can only be done with a proprietary

which

canister air

the

excessive. Inspect the canister vapor hoses and

A complete

Installation is otherwise the reverse of removal.

EVAP If

the canister inlet port for blockage or collapsed hoses. Also inspect the

vapor vent valve.

24

vapor valve.

run a series of checks

using the fuel tank pressure sensor and other output actuators to detect excessive pressure. You'll have to take the vehicle to a dealer service

25 Raise the vehicle and place

26 Clearly

label the

ter (see illustration),

27 Remove the and remove the

28

it

securely on jackstands.

two hoses connected

to the

EVAP

canister air

fil-

then disconnect them.

canister air

air filter

from

filter its

mounting

mounting

bolt (see illustration 21 .26)

bracket.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS

6-24

21 .30 Disconnect the vapor hose from the EVAP canister vent shut valve and disengage it from this

connector from the EVAP canister

21.33 Remove and discard this O-ring from the EVAP canister vent

vent shut valve, then remove the

shut valve; whether you're planning

hose

vent shut valve mounting screws

to install the old vent shut valve or a

and remove the valve from the

new unit, always use a new when installing the valve

21.31 Disconnect the electrical

clip

EVAP

canister

O-ring

"~3^i* ©=C5

,

i

Refer to illustration 18.9

18.3a Carefully remove the pull handle trim cover

BODY

18.3b ... to gain access

handle retaining screws

to the pull

11-15

18.5 Carefully pry the clips free so the door trim panel

can be removed

Rear doors

Tailgate

Sedan and CR-V models

I Refer to illustration 18.21

14 On manual window regulator equipped models, remove the win-

dow

crank (see illustration 18.1).

15 Remove the inside door handle trim cover. Remove the mounting screws, then detach the handle rod and electrical connector (see trations 18.2a,

remove the

pull

If

electrical

the tailgate upper trim panel and the

pull

handle trim cover, then If

left

and

right trim

illustration).

22 Remove the screw securing the cargo hook and remove the hook.

23 Remove the door Start

handle retaining screws.

dows, disconnect the

17

illus-

18.2b and 18.2c).

16 On Sedan models, remove the

Remove

21

panels by carefully releasing the clips (see

from the bottom

until all the fasteners

trim panel using a door panel removal tool.

of the trim panel

and work around the perimeter

have been released from the door.

equipped with power win-

connector from the window switch.

INSTALLATION

CR-V model, remove the armrest mounting window switch and disconnect the electrical

you're working on a

screws, then remove the

24

Prior to installation of the door trim panels and/or the tailgate

connector.

18 On CR-V models remove the door quarter trim panel, then

trim panel, be sure to reinstall any clips in the panel

come

out

when you removed

which may have

the panel.

remove the door trim panel upper push-pin. 19 Remove the door trim panel using a door panel removal tool (see illustration 18.5). Start

25 Position the wire harness connectors switch and the power

window switch

(if

for the

power door lock

equipped) on the back of the

from the bottom of the trim panel and work around panel, then place the panel in position in the door. Press the door panel

the perimeter until

all

the fasteners have been released from the door. into place until the clips are seated.

20 For access

to the

door outside handle or the door window regu-

lator inside the door, raise the

window

fully,

26 The remainder

of the installation is the reverse of removal.

then carefully peel back the

plastic watershield.

18.21 Tailgate trim panel details

18.9

Remove

the two fasteners securing the armrest

A

Upper trim panel

B

Left

and right trim panels

C D

Cargo hook Tailgate trim

panel

BODY

11-16 19 Door

-

removal, installation and adjustment

-Note the

1: On CR-V and 2004 hatchback models, you must reset power window control unit after you disconnect the driver's

door wiring harness (see Chapter 5, Section

•Note and

2:

install

at

From

and remove

heavy and somewhat awkward to remove least two people should perform this procedure.

The door -

1).

5

is

the door side, detach the rubber conduit between the

and the door. Then it

pull the wiring

body

harness through the conduit hole

from the door.

6

Remove

7

Mark around the door hinges with a pen

the door stop strut (see illustration). or a scribe to facilitate

realignment during reassembly.

8

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

With an assistant holding the door, remove the hinge-to-door

bolts (see illustration)

9 I Refer to illustrations 19.6 1

Lower the window completely

Open

the door

all

the

in

the door, then disconnect the

way and support

it

Remove

the door trim panel and water deflector as described in

Section 18.

4

Disconnect

electrical

connections, ground wires and harness

retaining clips from the door.

•Note:

It is a good idea reassembly process.

19.6

Remove

off.

ADJUSTMENT I Refer to illustrations 19.11 and 19.13

10 Having proper door-to-body alignment

to label all

is

a

critical part of

a well

functioning door assembly. First check the door hinge pins for excessive play. Fully

all

the door

1).

on jacks or blocks cov-

ered with rags to prevent damaging the paint.

3

lift

and 19.8

cable from the negative battery terminal (see Chapter 5, Section

2

and

Installation is the reverse of removal.

lifting

the body.

open the door and If

lift

up and down on the door without

a door has 1/16-inch or

more excessive

play, the

hinges should be replaced.

connections to aid the

the door strut retaining bolt

19.11 Loosen the hinge-to-body bolts to adjust the doors

11

Door-to-body alignment adjustments are made by loosening the

hinge-to-body bolts (see

19.8

Remove

illustration) or

hinge-to-door bolts and mov-

the door hinge bolts

19.13 Adjust the door lock striker by loosening the mounting

screws and gently tapping the striker

in

the desired direction

BODY ing the door. Proper

doors are

fender, the rear of the

body alignment

is

achieved when the top of the

parallel with the roof section, the front

door

is

door

is

flush with the rear quarter panel

doors are aligned with the lower rocker panel.

If

flush with the

and the bottom

these goals can't

be reached by adjusting the hinge-to-body or hinge-to-door bolts, body

alignment shims

may have

to

be purchased and inserted behind the

latch, lock cylinder

and handles

-

line or

mark around

the striker plate to provide a reference point, then check that the door latch is contacting the center of the latch striker.

down

position

is

If

not adjust the up and

first.

13 Finally adjust the panel

positive

hinges to achieve correct alignment.

20 Door

12 To adjust the door closed position, scribe a

11-17

latch striker

sideways position, so

flush with the center pillar or rear quarter panel

engagement with the

latch

mechanism

that the

door

and provides

(see illustration).

removal and installation

*# CAUTION: Wear gloves when working

inside the door openings to protect

against cuts from sharp metal edges.

DOOR LATCH I Refer to illustrations 20.2 and 20.3 Raise the window, then remove the door trim panel and water-

1

shield (see Section 18).

2 tector

Working through the

large access hole,

and glass run channel (see

remove the lock rod pro-

illustration).

3

Remove

4

Disengage the outside door handle-to-latch rod, outside door

the screws securing the latch to the door (see illustration).

lock-to-latch rod, the inside handle-to-latch rod,

and the lock sole-

noid-to-latch rod.

5

All

20.2

Remove

the plastic pin to release the lock rod

protector (A) then

door lock rods are attached by plastic

clips.

The

plastic clips

remove the fastener securing the

glass run channel (B)

can be removed by unsnapping the portion engaging the connecting rod and then pulling the rod out of

power door

Remove 6

its

locating hole.

On models

with

locks, disconnect the electrical connectors at the latch.

the latch

assembly from the door.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

11

the door trim panel and watershield (see Sec-

Working through the access

HANDLE

screws, then detach the handle rod and electrical connector (see illustrations 18.2a, 18.2b

13

tion 18).

8

remove the han-

12 Remove the inside door handle trim cover. Remove the mounting

To remove the outside handle and lock cylinder assembly, raise

window and remove

nuts, then

Installation is the reverse of removal.

INSIDE

I Refer to illustration 20.8

the

clip.

10 Remove the outside handle retaining dle from the vehicle.

OUTSIDE HANDLE AND DOOR LOCK CYLINDER

7

removing a

hole,

and 18.2c).

Installation is the reverse of removal.

disengage the plastic clips that

secure the outside handle-to-latch rod, the outside door lock-to-latch rod (see illustration).

9

The lock cylinder can be removed from the handle assembly by

20.3

Remove

the

screws from the end of the door latch

20.8 Detach the lock actuating rod (A) and handle-to-latch rod (B)

BODY

11-18

Door window glass

21

» Refer to illustration

-

removal and installation

21.2

CAUTION: Wear gloves when working

inside the door openings to protect

against cuts from sharp metal edges.

1

Remove

the door trim panel and the plastic watershield (see Sec-

tion 18).

2

Raise the

window glass

just

enough

to

access the window retain-

ing bolts through the holes in the door trame (see illustration).

3

Place a rag over the glass to help prevent scratching the glass

and remove the two glass mounting

bolts.

4

Remove

5

Installation is the reverse of removal.

the glass by tilting

it

slightly, pulling

it

up and

out.

21 .2 Raise the

window

just

enough

to

access the glass

retaining bolts through the holes in the door frame

the bolts securing the glass to the equalizer

22 Door window glass regulator > Refer to illustration

**

-

-

remove

arm

removal and installation

22.4

CAUTION:

Wear gloves when working

inside the door openings to protect

against cuts from sharp metal edges.

1

Remove

the door trim panel and the plastic watershield (see Sec-

tion 18).

2

Remove

3

On power operated windows, disconnect

the

window

glass assembly (see Section 21

).

the electrical connector

from the window regulator motor. 4

Remove

the regulator

remove 5

the regulator

assembly out

mounting bolts (see

illustration),

of the service hole in the

then slide

door frame

to

it.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

22.4 Door window glass regulator details

23 Rearview mirrors

-

A

Regulator motor electrical connector

B C

Regulator motor mounting bolts

Window regulator mounting

removal and installation

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

3

Remove

the three mirror retaining nuts and detach the mirror

from the vehicle (see I Refer to illustrations 23.1 1

Pry

2

Disconnect the

"••Note:

off

4

and 23.3

electrical

connector from the mirror

(if

illustration).

Installation is the reverse of removal.

INSIDE

the mirror trim cover (see illustration).

On some models the

bolts

MIRROR

equipped).

electrical connector plugs right

and can be unplugged without removing the door panel. On other models the electrical connector is located in the wiring harness, behind the door panel. See Section 18 for door panel removal, if necessary.

I Refer to illustrations 23.5 and 23.6

into the mirror

5

Detach the cover from the retaining bracket (see

6

Remove

7

Installation is the reverse Of removal.

illustration).

the screws and lower the mirror (see illustration).

BODY

11-19

23.1 Use a small screwdriver or trim removal tool to pry oft

23.3 To remove the mirror, remove these three nuts

the mirror cover

vehicle has power mirrors, unplug the electrical connector too

23.5

Remove

the mirror cover

24 Center console

-

Remove

23.6

• if

the

the three screws and detach the mirror

removal and installation

WARNING: Models covered by this manual are equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), more commonly known as airbags. Always disable the airbag system before working in the vicinity of any airbag system component to avoid the possibility of accidental deployment of the airbag, which could cause personal

3

At the rear of the console,

4

Slide the front seats

on the 5

front

of the rear

Remove

all

remove the fasteners from each

the

way

side.

to the rear, then carefully pull

console to release the

up

clips.

the rear half of the console by lifting

it

up and toward the

rear.

Front console

injury (see Chapter 12).

6

Pry out the dashboard center lower cover, remove the two con-

sole fasteners and disconnect the electrical connector. 1

Disconnect the cable from the negative terminal of the

see Chapter

5,

Section

7

battery,

Remove

8

HATCHBACK MODELS

of

9

Rear console Slide the front seats

remove the two

fas-

At the front of the console, remove the fasteners along both sides

console, then gently

remove

2

the mat from the console box, then

teners from the bottom of the box.

1

all

the

way

to the

forward position.

it

lift

the console

up and toward the

from the vehicle.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

rear to

BODY

11-20

COUPE AND SEDAN MODELS Console with armrest I Refer to illustrations 24.10a, 24.10b, 24.11a, 24.11b, 24.12a,

24.12b and 24.13 10

If

you're working on automatic transaxle model, pry off the gear

selector trim bezel and center console trim (see illustrations). ual transaxle

11

models, unscrew the

Remove

shift lever

On man-

knob.

the dashboard center lower cover and disconnect any

electrical connectors, then detach the parking brake lever trim panel

(see illustrations).

12 Remove the console retaining screws and surrounding fasteners (see illustrations).

13 Disconnect any

from the vehicle (see 14

Installation

is

electrical

connections and remove the console

illustration).

the reverse of removal.

24.10a Carefully detach the clips and remove the trim ring from around the shifter (automatic transaxle)

24.10b Carefully detach the clips and remove the trim

24.11a Pry

off

the dashboard center lower cover

panel (automatic transaxle model shown, manual transaxle

model similar)

24.11b Pull up and remove the brake lever trim panel

24.12a Remove the console mounting fasteners

BODY

24.12b

.

.

.

from the top of the center console. Don't forget

24.13

Lift

the rear of the console up, then pull

11-21

it

out

the fasteners securing the sides of the console

25 Dashboard trim panels

-

removal and installation and remove the panel (see

* WARNING:

3

Models covered by this manual are equipped with a SupplemenRestraint System (SRS), more commonly known as airbags. Always disable the airbag system before working in the vicinity of any airbag system component to avoid the possibility of accidental deployment of the airbag, which could cause personal tal

illustration).

Installation is the reverse of removal.

DRIVER'S INSTRUMENT PANEL

UNDER COVER

I Refer to illustration 25.4

injury (see Chapter 12).

1

4

Turn the locking knob and remove the panel (see

5

Installation is the reverse of removal.

illustration).

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see

Chapter

5,

Section

GLOVE BOX

1).

PASSENGER'S LOWER DASHBOARD COVER

I Refer to illustration 25.6 6

I Refer to illustration 25.2

Open

the glove box door and

remove the glove box stops, then

close the glove box (see illustration).

2

Pull the

edge

of the panel

down

until the clips are

disengaged

25.4 Turn the locking knob (A) and pull down the front 25.2 Carefully pull the panel down to release the clips (sedan model shown, other models similar)

of the

panel and release the rear part from the clip (B) (sedan

model shown, other models similar)

BODY

11-22

25.6

7

Remove

25.11

the glovebox stops

At the bottom of the glove box, remove the screws from the

hinges.

8

the glove box door and lower the glove box from the

instrument panel.

9

the cluster bezel retaining screws

Hatchback models 17

Open

Remove

Tilt

the steering wheel

the steering

down

to the lowest position, then

column upper cover (see Section

18 Grasp the bezel securely and gently

Installation is the reverse of removal.

pull

remove

26).

back to detach the clips

from the instrument panel.

19

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BEZEL

Installation is the reverse of removal.

DRIVER'S INSTRUMENT PANEL

LOWER COVER

Coupe and sedan models Coupe and sedan models

I Refer to illustration 25.11

10 Remove the steering column upper cover (see Section 26). 11

Remove

the screws (see illustration), then grasp the bezel

securely and pull back to detach the clips from the instrument panel.

12 Installation

is

the reverse of removal.

Tilt

the steering wheel up to the highest position.

21 Turn the locking knobs and remove the panel (see illustration). Installation is the reverse of removal.

CR-V models driver's

instrument panel lower cover (see Steps 23

through 26).

15 Grasp the bezel securely and gently

23 Open the access door

remove the fastener located

14 Remove the steering column upper cover (see Section 26). pull

back

to

detach the clips

from the instrument panel.

16

20

22

CR-V models 13 Remove the

I Refer to illustration 25.21

24 Open the

driver's side

under-dash fuse/relay box, and

the opening.

pocket and remove the fastener located

in

the opening.

25 Grasp the bottom

Installation is the reverse of removal.

for the in

and gently

pull

panel. Repeat the nectors, then

26

of the

instrument panel lower cover securely

back to detach the bottom clips from the instrument

same

for the

upper

clips.

Unplug any

electrical

con-

remove the panel.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

Hatchback models 27

Tilt

the steering wheel up to the highest position.

28 Turn the locking knob a 1/2-turn of the panel

29

and gently

pull

back

to

either way, then grasp the side

remove the panel.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

CENTER TRIM PANEL Coupe and sedan models I Refer to illustration 25.31

30 Remove the dashboard center lower cover (see Section 31

25.21

Give these two knobs a 1/2-turn either way, then

remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and down to release the clips

carefully pull

Remove

24).

the center trim panel mounting bolts, then release the

trim panel clips (see illustration).

32

Carefully slide the trim panel out far

enough

to

unplug any elec-

BODY

11-23

CR-V models 34 Remove the screws securing the lower edge

of the center trim

panel.

35 the

Lift

edges

the lower to

edge

of the panel

and work your way upward along

detach the clips. Unplug any electrical connectors, then

remove the panel. 36

Installation is the reverse of removal.

Hatchback models 37 Remove the

driver's instrument panel lower cover (see

Steps 27

through 29).

38 Remove the passenger's lower dashboard cover (see

illustra-

tion 25.2).

39 Remove the glove box (see Steps 6 through 40 Using a

ratchet

9).

wrench with an 11 -inch extension or a long

screwdriver, wrap the end with a towel, then carefully insert the end

through the glove box opening and gently release the clips by pushing

Remove

25.31

the center trim panel mounting bolts

from under the

(arrows), then carefully pry the panel using a trim stick

41

Remove

shift lever trim.

the center panel fasteners from the driver's lower cover

and glove box openings. trical

connectors that interfere with removal, then remove the trim panel

from the dashboard.

33

42 Carefully trical

Installation is the reverse of removal.

26 Steering column covers

-

slide the trim panel out far

enough

to

unplug any elec-

connectors that interfere with removal, then remove the trim panel

from the dashboard.

removal and installation

I Refer to illustration 26.4

** WARNING: Models covered by this manual are equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), more commonly known as airbags. Always disable the airbag system before working in the vicinity of any airbag system component to avoid the possibility of accidental deployment of the airbag, which could cause personal injury (see Chapter 12).

1

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see

Chapter

5,

Section

2

Remove

3

On

tilt

1).

the driver's instrument panel lower cover (see Section 25).

steering columns,

move

the

column

to the lowest posi-

tion.

4

Remove

the retaining screws, then separate the halves and

remove the covers (see 5

illustration).

Installation is the reverse of the

27 Instrument panel

-

26.4 Steering column cover retaining screws (Sedan model removal procedure.

shown, other models similar)

removal and installation

> Refer to illustrations 27.7, 27.9, 27.11, 27.16, 27.17a

and 27.17b

** WARNING:

—

Note 1: This is a difficult procedure for the home mechanic. There are many hidden fasteners, difficult angles to work in and many electrical connectors to tag and disconnect/connect. We recommend that this procedure be done only by an experienced do-it-yourselfer.

Models covered by this manual are equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), more commonly known as airbags. Always disable the airbag system before working in the vicinity of any airbag system component to avoid the possibility of accidental deployment of the airbag, which could cause personal injury (see Chapter 12).

-•Note

2:

notes of

During removal of the instrument panel,

how each

piece

comes

other pieces and what holds part is installed before

it

off,

in

removing

panel back together again will be

where

place. it,

If

it

fits in

make

careful

relation to

you note how each

getting the instrument

much

easier.

.

BODY

11-24

27.7

Remove

the front pillar trim by

carefully releasing the clips

•Note

3:

It

27.9 Carefully detach both side

27.11 Carefully pry

kick panels

dashboard side covers

it is suggested to remove both working space and lessen the the seats during this procedure.

not necessary, but

is

front seats to allow additional

chance 1

of

damage

to

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see

Chapter 2

5,

Section

Remove

both

off

1).

the steering wheel (see Chapter 10).

equipped, remove the center floor console (see Section 24).

3

If

4

Remove

the instrument cluster bezel (see Section 25).

5

Remove

the instrument cluster (see Chapter

6

Remove

all

7

Remove

the front pillar trim (see illustration).

8

Remove

the nuts and lower the steering

9

Remove

the side kick panels (see illustration).

of the

1 2).

dashboard trim panels described

Remove

the

dashboard side covers (see

Section 25.

column (see Chapter

10 On CR-V models, remove the passenger's side 11

in

1 0).

vent.

illustration).

12 Remove the glove box (see Section 25). 13 Remove the radio (see Chapter 12) and the heater control assembly (see Chapter 3).

14 Remove the

rear vent duct.

15 Disconnect the instrument panel

electrical connectors.

—Note: A number of electrical connectors must be disconnected in order to remove the instrument panel. Most are designed so on the matching connector (male or any doubt, mark the connectors with masking tape and a marking pen before disconnecting them.

that they will only

female), but

27.16 Remove the instrument panel center brace mounting

model shown, other models similar)

bolts (sedan

27.17a Remove the bolts from the support structure on the left .

.

if

fit

there

is

16 Remove the fasteners securing the lower center

ment panel (see

part of the instru-

illustration).

27.17b ... and the right side of the instrument panel (sedan model shown, other models similar)

BODY 17 Remove the fasteners from each end

of the instrument panel (see

18

Pull the instrument panel

towards the rear of the vehicle and

detach any electrical connectors interfering with removal.

19 Once

panel then pull driver's

illustrations).

the electrical connectors are detached,

all

28 Cowl cover

-

lift

is

the windshield wiper

2

arms (see Chapter

28.2a Using a fastener removal

hood seal

.

29 Seats

tool,

1

2).

3

remove the

out through the

a two-person job.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

Remove

1.

the

hood

and the push-pin fasteners securing the

seal

illustrations).

Installation is the reverse of removal.

28.2b

.

.

.

then detach the plastic fasteners and remove the

cowl (sedan model shown, other models similar)

.

-

removal and installation

## WARNING The

it

21 Reconnect the battery. Refer to Chapter 5, Section

cowl cover (see

Remove

the windshield and take

removal and installation

> Refer to illustrations 28.2a and 28.2b 1

away from

door opening.

••Note: This

20 the instrument

it

11-25

1:

on some models are equipped with pre-ten-

front seat belts

sioners, which are pyrotechnic (explosive) devices designed to retract the seat belts in the event of a collision.

On models

equipped with pre-tensioners, do not remove the front seat belt retractor assemblies, and do not disconnect the electrical connectors leading to the assemblies. Problems with the pre-tensioners will turn on the SRS (airbag) warning light on the dash. If any pre-tensioner problems are suspected, take the vehicle to a dealer service department.

WARNING

2:

On models with side-impact airbags, be sure to disarm the airbag system before beginning this procedure (see Chapter 12).

FRONT SEAT 29.2a Move the front seat rear retaining bolts I Refer to illustrations 29.2a 1

2 to

5,

Section

1).

Position the seat

all

the

all

the

way forward

to

access the

.

and 29.2b

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see

Chapter

.

way

forward, then

access the seat retaining bolts (see

all

illustrations).

the

way

to the rear

3

Detach any bolt trim covers and remove the retaining

4

Tilt

any 5

the seat

electrical

upward

to

connectors and

bolts.

access the underneath, then disconnect lift

the seat from the vehicle.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

BODY

11-26

29.2b

way

.

.

.

then

move

to the rear to

the seat

all

29.6a

the

access the front

Remove

29.6b Remove the fasteners

the rear seat cushion

securing the seat hinge

retaining bolt

retaining bolts

back trim cover, then remove the fasteners securing the seat hinge and

REAR SEAT

remove the seat backs (see 7

t Refer to illustrations 29.6a and 29.6b

On CR-V models,

tilt

illustration).

the seat forward and

bolts at the front of the seat.

6

On Coupe, Sedan and Hatchback models, remove

ion bolt

and remove the cushion (see

30 Radiator

grille

-

Remove

the front

Remove

the fasteners securing the

bumper cover

(see Section 11).

edges

of the grille to the

Installation is the reverse of removal.

disengage

3

Pull the grille forward to

4

Installation is the reverse of removal.

it

from the bumper.

cover.

Tailgate latch, lock cylinder and handle (CR-V models)

Wear gloves when working

inside the door openings to protect against cuts from sharp metal edges.

5

the tailgate and

remove

the tailgate trim panel (see Sec-

Reaching through the access hole, detach the actuating rod from

the rear of the lock cylinder.

6

Open

removal and installation

-

LOCK CYLINDER

** CAUTION:

1

retaining

removal and installation

1

31

8

remove the

the seat from the vehicle.

back the seat

illustration). Pull

2

bumper

the seat cush-

Remove

Remove

remove 7

it

the lock cylinder retaining clip and pull

from the

it

outward

to

tailgate handle.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

tion 18).

HANDLE

LATCH

8 2

Reaching through the access hole, detach the

tailgate rod

and

cylinder rod then disconnect the actuator connector from the latch.

3

Remove

latch

mounting screws and remove the

tailgate.

4

Installation is the reverse of removal.

latch

from the

Reaching through the access hole, remove the lock cylinder (see

Steps 5 and 9

6).

Remove

to the tailgate.

the bolt securing the lock cylinder protector and handle

Release the clip and remove the protector.

10 Remove the

bolt securing the

handle and spacer handle to the

tailgate.

remove the handle from the

11

Carefully

12

Installation is the reverse of removal.

tailgate.

BODY 32 Tailgate and assist -••Note: at least

(CR-V models)

strut

The tailgate is heavy and somewhat awkward two people should perform this procedure.

-

removal, installation and adjustment gate bolts (see illustration) and remove the tailgate from the vehicle.

to hold

7

1

Remove

the spare

gate and support

it

tire

from the tailgate

if

equipped. Open the

tail-

securely with several jack stands. Place pads or

the hinge-to-tailgate bolts

and moving the

32.6). Proper alignment

achieved when the edges of the tailgate are

Remove

Working through the openings

the tailgate trim panel (see Section 31 in the tailgate

4

From

tailgate.

hole and remove

it

Then

from the

pull the wiring

Remove

6

While an assistant supports the

32.5

harness through conduit

tailgate

sill.

wedge by

slightly loosening the bolts

the

in

the adjustment slots.

handle open, close the tailgate

with the body and the latch bolts

tailgate,

Finally, adjust the tailgate

While holding the

the tailgate assist strut (see illustration).

Remove

10

and centering the wedge between the holes

tailgate.

5

panels and the lower door

provide positive engagement with the latch mechanism.

).

frame, disconnect

the tailgate side, detach the rubber conduit between the

body and the

tailgate (see illustration

Adjust the latch striker assembly as necessary (up and down) to

9

wiring harness connectors leading to the tailgate.

all

is

parallel with the rear quarter

cloths between the jack stands and the tailgate to protect the paint.

3

Adjustments are made by loosening the hinge-to-body bolts or

8

and 32.6

2

Installation is the reverse of removal.

ADJUSTMENT

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION I Refer to illustrations 32.5

11-27

mechanism engages. Tighten

and recheck the adjustment, making sure the

until

the

it

is

flush

wedge

tailgate is flush with

body when closed.

detach the hinge-to-tail-

32.6 Tailgate hinge-to-tailgate bolts

the bolts securing the assist strut

to the tailgate

33 Rear hatch glass and support struts (CR-V models)

-

removal, installation and adjustment 4

** WARNING:

Detach the support struts

at the rear

hatch glass.

ing the glass support struts, detach the strut from the

The rear hatch glass

is

heavy and awkward

to hold. At least

two

people should perform this procedure.

manner as you detached 5

Remove

6

1

Open

you're replacin

the

same

the strut from the glass.

the rear hatch glass

assistant, preferably two, helps

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

If

body

mounting

you hold the

Installation is the reverse of the

nuts, while at least

one

rear hatch glass.

removal procedure. Be extremely

careful not to overtighten the fasteners.

the rear hatch glass and support

it

fully in this position.

If

ADJUSTMENT

you're just replacing the glass support struts proceed to Step 4.

2

Remove

the tailgate upper trim panel

and the

left

and

right trim

3

Remove

the screws

and detach the

cover. Also

remove the high mount brake

on the tabs

at the side.

the

Disconnect the

7

Adjustments are made by loosening the hinge-to-body bolts or

the hinge-to-glass bolts

panels by carefully releasing the clips. rear windshield wiper light

motor

cover by pushing inward

electrical

connector and remove

mounting nuts then remove the high mount brake

light.

and moving the

glass. Proper alignment is

achieved when the edges of the glass are parallel with the rear quarter panel pillars and the top of the tailgate.

8

Adjust the latch striker assembly as necessary (up and down) to

provide positive engagement with the latch mechanism.

BODY

11-28

34 Rear shelf trim panel

-

> Refer to illustrations 34.3a, 34.3b 1

Remove

2

Open

3

Detach the roof

removal and installation and 34.3c

the rear seat cushion and seat back (see Section 29).

the trunk

and disconnect the high mounted brake pillar trim

light

pieces on both sides, then remove the

lock cylinder trim ring and detach the shelf trim panel (see illustrations).

4

Installation is the reverse of the

removal procedure.

34.3a Carefully

pull

on the roof

pillar trim

pieces to detach

the clips

34.3b Pry or

pull the plastic trim ring

from around

the lock cylinder

34.3c Carefully pull up on the shelf trim panel to release the clips

Section 1

General information

2

Electrical troubleshooting - general information

3

Fuses

4

Circuit breakers - general information

5

Relays

6

Turn signal and hazard flasher

7

Steering column switches

8

Ignition switch

9

Dashboard switches

10

Instrument cluster

1

Wiper motor

12

Radio and speakers

13

Antenna

1

Rear window defogger

15

Headlight bulb

16

Headlights

17

Headlight housing

18

Horn

19

Bulb replacement

20

Electric side

21

-

-

-

general information

general information and testing

-

-

-

-

check and replacement

replacement

and key lock cylinder

-

-

replacement

replacement

-

removal and installation

check and replacement -

removal and installation

removal and installation

-

-

-

check and repair

replacement

adjustment -

replacement

replacement

view mirrors

-

general information

Cruise control system

-

general information

22

Power window system

-

general information

23

Power door lock system

24

Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

25

Airbag system

26

Wiring diagrams

-

-

general information -

general information

general information -

general information

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-2

General information

1

The

electrical

the lights and

all

which

battery,

is

system

is

electrical

a 12-volt, negative ground type. Power for accessories

charged by the

supplied by a lead/acid-type

is

alternator.

components not associated with

in

Chapter It

This Chapter covers repair and service procedures for the various electrical

the battery, ignition system, alternator and starter motor can be found

the engine. Information on

Electrical troubleshooting

-

an

electrical

component,

any switches,

relays, motors, fuses, fusible links or circuit breakers

related to that

component and

component included circuit

to both the battery

at the

end

of this

and connectors

that link the

and the chassis. Wiring diagrams are

Chapter

to help

you pinpoint an

electrical

problem.

that individual circuit. Noting

spots,

down.

If

several

are the problem

is in

components

other

related to

components or

3

Electrical

circuits

fail

at

one time, chances

a fuse or ground connection, because several cir-

cuits are often routed through the

same fuse and ground connections.

problems usually stem from simple causes, such as

failed relay. Visually inspect the condition of

nections

4

If

in

test

equipment and instruments are going

connections

DD.D

5

w

J I

•

1

1

fuses, wires

all

and con-

a problem circuit before troubleshooting the circuit.

the diagrams to plan ahead of time

'

if

the circuit are operating correctly, for instance, can often narrow trouble

loose or corroded connections, a blown fuse, a melted fusible link or a

Before tackling any troublesome electrical circuit, study the

2

portions of the electrical system are

appropriate wiring diagrams to get a complete understanding of what

typical electrical circuit consists of

the wiring

when

battery to prevent electrical shorts and/or fires.

makes up

A

that

serviced, the negative battery cable should be disconnected from the

general information

I Refer to illustrations 2.5a and 2.5b 1

5.

should be noted

in

where you

will

to

be

make

utilized,

use

the necessary

order to accurately pinpoint the trouble spot.

Basic electrical troubleshooting tools include a circuit

light or voltmeter, a continuity tester, a set of test leads

tester, test

and a jumper

wire (preferably with a circuit breaker), which can be used to bypass electrical

s^^D^^**\w CI

where

HI Jk

components (see

problem with to

illustrations). Before

test instruments,

make

attempting to locate a

use the wiring diagram(s)

to

decide

the connections.

VOLTAGE CHECKS I Refer to illustration 2.6

6

Voltage checks should be performed

ing correctly.

2.5a The most useful tool for electrical troubleshooting is

a digital multimeter that can check volts,

and

Connect one lead

battery terminal or a

if

a circuit

is

not function-

of a circuit tester to either the negative

known good ground. Connect

the other lead to a

amps,

test continuity

2.6

In

use, a basic test light's lead

is

clipped to a

good ground, then the pointed probe can 2.5b A simple test testing voltage

light is a

very handy tool for

wires or electrical sockets

- if

known

test connectors,

the bulb lights, the circuit

being tested has battery voltage

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM connector

which means battery

same

is

being tested, preferably nearest to the battery or

in the circuit

fuse (see illustration).

the bulb of the tester lights, voltage

If

problem

Continue checking the

free.

When you

Most

of the

and the

present,

is

point with voltage.

last test

time the problem can be traced to a loose connection.

~Note: Keep

when

rest of the circuit in the

reach a point at which no voltage

the problem lies between that point

present,

is

between the connector and the

that the part of the circuit

fashion.

12-3

mind

that

the ignition key

is in

in

some circuits receive voltage the ACC or ON position.

only

FINDING A SHORT One method

7

of finding shorts in a live circuit is to

fuse and connect a test light

remove the

place of the fuse terminals (fabricate

in

two jumper wires with small spade terminals, plug the jumper wires

box and connect the

into the fuse

age present

the circuit.

in

Move

test light).

side-to-side while watching the test

somewhere

short to ground

There should be no volt-

the suspected wiring harness from light.

in that area,

the bulb goes on, there

If

is

a

probably where the insulation

2.9 With a multimeter set to the

ohm

be checked across two terminals

-

scale, resistance can

when checking

for

continuity, a low reading indicates continuity, a high reading

has rubbed through.

or infinity indicates high resistance or lack of continuity

GROUND CHECK through the wires, switches, relays, fuses and fusible links to each

component

electrical

Perform a ground

8

test to

check whether a component

(light bulb, motor, etc.)

correctly

is

which

it

is

passed back

Any

to the battery.

grounded. Disconnect the battery and connect one lead of a continuity interruption in the flow of electricity to tester or multimeter (set to the

Connect the other lead the resistance

is

ohm

scale), to a

to the wire or

and

to

electrical

and from the

ground, from

problem

low (less than 5 ohms), the ground

good.

is

bulb on a self-powered test light does not go on, the ground

tested.

If

the

is

not

If

CONNECTORS 12 Most

electrical

connections on these vehicles consist of multi-

ple-terminal plastic connectors.

The two halves

of

most connectors

locked together by tabs molded into the plastic connector shells.

CONTINUITY CHECK

always look

for the release tab(s) or locking tab(s)

I Refer to illustration 2.9

cuit.

tor is too dirty to find the release or locking tab(s),

a continuity check to verify that there are no opens in a cir-

With the

circuit off

(no power

in

the circuit), a self-powered conti-

nuity tester or multimeter can be used to check the circuit. test leads to

both ends of the circuit (or to the "power" end and a good

ground), and

if

the test light

correctly (see illustration).

there

is

continuity;

break somewhere

if

in

If

comes on

the circuit

the resistance

the reading the circuit.

is

is

With the switch turned

to

is

10,000 ohms or higher, there

The same procedure can be used

is

ON, the

test light

a

to

switch termi-

to the

should come on (or

If

it

the connec-

off.

If

a con-

some connectors

before you figure out

how

to

separate the two halves, because the locking or release tabs are

engaged

a

in

way

that is not

have not one but two sets

passing current

wipe

a dark area, use a flashlight. You might have to look

is in

closely (very closely!) at

immediately

clear.

And many connectors

of release or locking tabs.

13 Connectors are usually locked together by release tabs

low (less than 5 ohms),

by connecting the continuity tester

test a switch,

nals.

Connect the

nector

are

So

on a connector and

release it/them before trying to disconnect the connector.

Do

an

known good ground.

ground connection being

good.

9

is

battery.

that

you

simply depress to release, or by locking tabs that you spread apart or pry loose from

some

Once you have

figured out

projection on the other half of the connector.

how

to release a connector with locking or

release tabs, carefully depress the release tabs or pry the locking tabs apart with a small screwdriver, then separate the connector halves. Pull

low resistance should be indicated on a meter).

only on the connector halves. Never pull on the wires or the wiring har-

FINDING AN OPEN CIRCUIT

ness, because you might

damage

the wires

and terminals inside the

connector.

10 locate

When

diagnosing

them by

for possible

open

circuits,

it

is

sight because the connectors hide oxidation or terminal

misalignment. Merely wiggling a connector on a sensor or wiring harness

when an open mittent

may

correct the

open

circuit is indicated

circuit condition.

in

this

a circuit. Inter-

problems may also be caused by oxidized or loose connec-

Electrical troubleshooting is

simple

electrical circuits are basically electricity

if

you keep

in

mind

that all

running from the battery,

pair of connector terminals has a "male" half

half.

This

side or the ror

In

is

particularly important to

connector terminal guide

because you need

images

end-view

tions.

11

"female" at a

the

Remember

when troubleshooting

14 Each

often difficult to

to

of

each

one

a wiring diagram or wiring schematic,

know whether

component side of

in

other,

half will

you're looking at the wiring harness

of the connector.

and a terminal be on the

left

other words, the terminal locations

applicable

- will

be "flipped").

and a

remember when you look

-

Connector halves are mir-

that is

shown on

the right side

side end view of the other half.

and terminal numbering,

if

.

1

2-4

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Fuses

3

-

general information also refer to your owner's manual, which includes a complete guide to

FUSES

all

fuses and relays

an

If

I Refer to illustrations 3.1a, 3.1b, 3.1c

The

electrical circuits of the vehicle are protected

of fuses, circuit breakers

and relays

5).

Fuse and

relay

(for

boxes are located

is

by a combination

more information about

ment and underneath the dashboard (see mini and maxi-style fuses

way

more information about

breakers, refer to Section 4; for

Section

and 3.2

used

in

circuit

relays, refer to

A wide

to protect various circuits.

array of

These

fuses, which employ a blade terminal design, can be removed and installed without special tools. circuits,

and the protected

cover.

the fuse panel cover

If

Each fuse protects a specific

circuits are identified is difficult to

circuit or

on the fuse panel

read, or missing,

three fuse/relay boxes.

in all

component

check a fuse

is

If

but not the other, the fuse

is

to replace

always check the fuse

is

blown. it

Check

light.

power

firmed by visually inspecting

Be sure

fails,

with a test

terminal tips of each fuse.

the engine compart-

illustrations).

to

electrical

for

power

The best

first.

exposed

at the

present on one side of the fuse

A blown

fuse can also be con-

(see illustration).

blown fuses with the correct

type.

Fuses

of dif-

ferent ratings are physically interchangeable, but only fuses of the correct rating

should be used. Replacing a fuse with one

lower value than specified

needs a specific amount fuse

you can

is

If

molded

not

recommended. Each

of protection.

of a

higher or

electrical circuit

The amperage value

of

each

into the fuse body.

the replacement fuse immediately

the cause of the problem will

is

be a short circuit

in

is

isolated

fails,

don't replace

and corrected.

In

it

again

most cases,

until

this

the wiring caused by a broken or deteriorated

wire.

3.1a On coupes and sedans, the engine compartment fuse/relay box

is

located on the right side of the engine

compartment. The functions and locations

and relays are

listed

of the various

fuses

on the fuse/relay box cover (on CR-Vs and

hatchbacks, this fuse/relay box

is

located on the

left

side of

3.1b To access the fuse/relay box inside the passenger

compartment

of a

coupe, sedan or hatchback, give these two

fasteners a 1/2-turn either way, then remove the driver's

the engine compartment)

dashboard lower cover

.

.

3.1c ... to expose the under-dash fuse and relay box (on

CR-Vs, the under-dash fuse/relay box is located in the same spot but has an access door in the driver's dashboard lower cover, so you don't have to

remove the cover)

3.2

When

melts

-

right is

a fuse blows, the

the fuse on the

good

left is

element between the terminals blown, the fuse on the

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Circuit breakers

4

-

general information

Circuit breakers protect certain circuits,

The number

or heated seats.

depends on

cle

such as the power windows

of circuit breakers

electrical accessories.

its

Some

employed on your vehi-

ground somewhere which causes the

the circuit that's causing the current overload,

in

circuit breaker to cycle the circuit

located in a fuse/relay box; others are located as stand-alone units

fuse panel, but just far

should

Because a

other locations throughout the vehicle.

circuit breaker resets automatically, a

temporary or

system

mittent electrical overload in a circuit-breaker-protected

cause the

open momentarily, then close again.

circuit to

If

it

probe with a voltmeter. The breaker

to

of the circuit

breaker with the positive meter probe.

There should be battery voltage

a circuit-

off.

socket on the

contact the sockets.

still

each end prong

only

one end, the

at

Some

immediately. There's probably an intermittent short or

Relays

5

enough

its

With the voltmeter negative lead on a good chassis ground, touch

inter-

will

breaker-protected circuit does not close, or constantly opens and closes, check

on and

For a basic check, pull the circuit breaker up out of

circuit breakers are

under the dash and

in

12-5

each end.

at

circuit breakers

If

there

battery voltage

is

must be replaced.

circuit breaker

must be

reset manually.

general information and testing

-

Normally-open Type A relays

GENERAL INFORMATION

I Refer to illustration 5.4

Many

1

starter,

and fog lamps,

components. be used relay

is

accessories

electrical

to

A

for

example

-

the fuel injection system, horns, -

use relays

open and close a high-current

defective, the

circuit (the

power

circuit).

component(s) powered by the high-current

Normally-open type

3

to control current to

If

Condenser fan

relay

Headlight relay No.

compartment fuse/relay box and

Headlight relay No.

under the dash (see test

it

or near the fuse

illustrations 3.1a

and

using the procedure below, or have

department or a repair shop.

If

a relay

is

3.1c). it

If

and

relay

a relay

is

boxes

it.

1

(2001 models)

2 (2001 models)

Headlight relay (2002 and later models)

suspect,

Horn

tested by a dealer service

defective, replace

relays are used for:

sensor relay

Air/fuel (A/F) ratio

a

circuit

controlled by the relay will not operate. Relays are located in the engine in

A

Air-conditioning clutch relay

relay allows a low-current circuit (the control circuit) to

relay

Power window

Relays

relay

Radiator fan relay

cannot be repaired.

Reverse relay

TESTING

Starter cut relay Taillight relay

2

There are three basic types of relays used

in

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) relay (Canadian models)

these vehicles: nor-

mally-open Type A, normally-open Type B and the five-terminal type.

Type nal

A and Type B

relays have similar internal circuitry, but their exter-

spade terminals are arranged

ferently. Five-terminal relays

differently

and

numbered

they're

more

external

spade terminal than Type A and Type B

relay,

remove

it

relays.

from the vehicle and use an ohmmeter

to

To

check

test a

for

1

relay No.

2

Type A relays (see

nals:

illustration)

have four external spade termi-

two horizontal terminals, one on top

terminals, side-by-side, below them.

In

of the other, with

to

determine whether you're dealing with a Type

the relay

you want

to test

on a

©

©

that's

what

they're

all

looks

it

like,

parallel to

it's

you want

know which to

is

terminal Nos.

1

and

1

,

©

If

it

and some

All

left-to-right,

is

No.

Type

2, respectively. left

So an easy

relay is to place

two horizontal

its

on the bottom.

Some Type A

don't.

If

the Type

relays are

relays

A

simple way

numbered from

so once you have your Type

And

relay

how do you

2, etc.? Here's a

A

If

has four terminals, but

two horizontal terminals

at the top,

A

those are

the two vertical terminals

to right,

so those two lower termi-

nals are Nos. 3 and 4.

5

To

test a

normally-open Type A relay verify that there

nuity between terminal No.

42026-12-5.4

HAYNES

nected.

No. 2

5.4 Normally-open Type

relay.

which

below them are numbered from

©

so that

have numbered terminals,

No.

relay positioned with the

it

a Type B relay.

it's

determine terminal numbering:

top-to-bottom and from

A

(1,2, 3. 4)

to test doesn't

terminal

A

vertical terminals are

a Type

each other,

have numbered terminals that

two

its

vertical

workbench, with the spade

table top or

terminals facing toward you. Then position terminals are on top and

two

other words, the two horizontal

terminals are perpendicular to the two vertical terminals.

way

continuity.

relay No.

PGM-FI main 4

dif-

have different internal circuitry and one

PGM-FI main

A

relay

Then

when

1

and No. 2 when the power

verify that there is continuity

the No. 3

ground, respectively.

is

is

no conti-

discon-

between terminal No.

and No. 4 terminals are connected

to

1

and

power and

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-6

Normally-open Type B relays

supposed

it's

trol circuit)

to (closes the other circuit

then you got

right.

it

If

when you power up

doesn't, flip

it

it

I Refer to illustration 5.7

To test a normally-open Type B relay verify that there

8

Normally-open Type B relays are used

6

nuity between terminal No.

for:

nected.

Blower motor relay

Then

and No. 3 when the power

1

the con-

over and retest

is

is

discon-

between terminal No.

verify that there is continuity

it.

no conti-

and

1

No. 3 when the No. 2 and No. 4 terminals are connected to power and

Rear window defogger relay

ground, respectively.

Type B relays also have four external spade terminals (see

7

tration), but they're

arranged

in

two parallel rows, with two terminals

per row. So to identify a Type B horizontal

(NOT

vertical!).

If

relay, lay

two

it

left

of the terminals are closer together,

corner

is

No.

1,

cation works well on Type

B relays

corner

left

like the

motor relays because they each have a set

nal Nos.

1

and

where both terminals -

Nos. 2 and 4

3), there's

relay "right side up"

If

the No.

1

because

terminal

-

no way

down. On these Type Bs, look nal.

for:

No. 3 and

is

Moonroof-opening relay

No. 4. This method of identifi-

is

type

1

isn't

it

in

of terminals that are closer

each row are parallel

are the to

same distance

window

(i.e.

the

apart as termi-

be sure that you have placed the

looks the

for the

same

number

numbered,

1

you'll

Low-beam

cut relay (Canadian models)

and type 2 blower

together (Nos. 2 and 4). But on Type B relays such as the rear

two on the right

Five-terminal relays are used

9

the terminal in the upper

right corner is No. 2, the terminal in the lower

relay,

Then

I Refer to illustration 5.10

Moonroof-closing relay

the terminal in the lower right corner

defogger

Five-terminal type relays

with the four terminals

flat

position the relay so that those two terminals are on your right. the terminal in the upper

illus-

right side

up or upside

next to the No.

have

and then see what happens when you power up the

to take a relay.

If

it

1

termi-

guess

works as

10 Five-terminal relays are easy

to identify

because they have

five

terminals (see illustration) instead of four. To determine the terminal

numbering, place a five-terminal relay with

and

parallel to the table top,

its

two terminals

and with the other three

underneath the two upper horizontal ones. The top terminal the

one below

left

to right,

it

Nos.

is

1

the top

is

No.

1,

No. 2 and the three terminals below No. 2 are, from

3,

4 and

5.

11 To test a five-terminal relay verify that there

terminal No.

at

vertical terminals

and No. 4 when the power

that there is continuity

is

between terminal No.

and ground are connected

to the No.

is

continuity between

disconnected. Then verify 1

and No. 2 when power

3 and No. 5 terminals.

%

^

—



©

©

i

~i

r~~i

#

42026-12-5.7

Q HAYNES

5.7 Normally-open Type B relay

6

Turn signal and hazard flasher relay

42026-12-5.10

5.10 Five-terminal relay

-

check and replacement

I Refer to illustration 6.1

The turn signal and hazard flashers are controlled by the turn

1

signal

WARNING:

and hazard flasher

relay,

fuse and relay box under the

2

The models covered by this manual are equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), commonly referred to as airbags. Always disable the airbag system before working in the vicinity of any airbag system component to avoid the possibility of accidental deployment of the airbag, which could cause personal injury (see Section 25).

HAYNES

click

If

the flasher unit

when

it's

is

operating.

which

left

is

located on the under-dash

side of the dash (see illustration).

functioning correctly, you'll hear an audible

If

one

of the turn signal indicator lights

on the

instrument cluster flashes more rapidly than normal, a turn signal bulb for that side

3

blown

If

has a blown filament.

neither turn signal indicator blinks, the

fuse, a faulty turn signal

problem might be a

and hazard flasher

switch or a loose or open connection.

If

the

left

relay,

a broken

or right turn signal fuse

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-7

has blown, check the wiring for a short before installing a new fuse.

4

To access the under-dash fuse and relay box, remove the driver's

dashboard lower cover (see 5

Pull the turn signal

illustration 3.1b).

and hazard flasher

relay straight out to

The turn signal and hazard flasher

6.1

remove 6

it.

If

the turn signal and hazard flasher relay

when buying a replacement

unit.

Make sure

is

bad, take

that the

it

with you

replacement unit

unit is located

is

identical to the original.

7

on

the under-dash fuse/relay box

Installation is the reverse of removal.

Steering column switches

-

replacement

WARNING: The models covered by this manual are equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), more commonly known as airbags. Always disable the airbag system before working in the vicinity of any airbag system component to avoid the possibility of accidental deployment of the airbag, which could cause personal injury (see Section 25).

1

ter 5,

2

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see ChapSection

1),

Remove

then wait

at least three

minutes before proceeding.

the driver's dashboard lower cover (see illustration 3.1 b)

and the steering column covers (see Chapter 11).

MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH I Refer to illustrations 7.3, 7.4

and 7.5 7.3 To disconnect the electrical connector from the multi-

3

Disconnect the

electrical

connector from the multi-function

function switch, depress this release tab

switch (see illustration).

4

Remove

the multi-function switch retaining screws (see illustra-

tion).

7

After you're done, reconnect the cable to the negative battery ter-

minal (see Chapter

5

Remove

6

Installation is the reverse of removal.

5,

Section

1).

the multi-function switch (see illustration).

7.5 To remove the multi-function switch, carefully pry the

combination switch housing

off

the small lug on the multi-

7.4 To detach the multi-function switch, remove

function switch housing with a small screwdriver, then pull

these two screws

the multi-function switch straight out to the side

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-8

7.8 Disconnect the electrical

7.9 To detach the windshield

7.10 To remove the windshield

connector from the windshield

wiper/washer switch, remove these

wiper/washer switch

two screws

wiper/washer switch, carefully pry the combination switch housing off the small lug on the wiper switch

housing with a small screwdriver,

WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH

then pull the switch straight out to the right

I Refer to illustrations 7.8, 7.9

8

Disconnect the

electrical

wiper/washer switch (see

9

Remove

and 7.10 10 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch (see

connector from the windshield

11 Installation

illustration).

the windshield wiper/washer switch retaining screws

8

12 After you're done, reconnect the cable minal (see Chapter

(see illustration).

Ignition switch

and key lock cylinder

-

illustration).

the reverse of removal.

is

5,

Section

to the negative battery ter-

1).

replacement

** WARNING: models covered by this manual are equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), more commonly known as airbags. Always disable the airbag system before working in the vicinity of any airbag system component to avoid the possibility of accidental deployment of the airbag, which could cause personal injury (see Section 25). All

1

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see

Chapter

5,

Section

1),

then wait at least three minutes before proceed-

ing.

2

Remove

the driver's dashboard lower cover (see illustration 3.1 b)

and the steering column covers (see Chapter

IGNITION

11).

SWITCH 8.3 Ignition switch and key lock cylinder electrical

I Refer to illustrations 8.3 and 8.4

connectors 3

Disconnect the

electrical

connector from the ignition switch (see 1

illustration).

4

Remove

the ignition switch

mounting screws (see

illustration)

and remove the switch. 5

Installation is the reverse of removal.

When

you're done/recon-

Ignition switch electrical connector

2

Ignition key lock cylinder electrical connector

3

Immobilizer control unit/receiver electrical connector

4

Ignition

key lock cylinder/key

light electrical

connector

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

8.4 To detach the ignition switch, remove these two screws

8.7 To detach the key lock cylinder housing from the steering

column, nect the cable to the negative battery terminal and perform the

procedure (see Chapter

idle learn

5,

Section

ignition switch operates correctly in the

1),

PCM

12-9

drill

remove the

out the bolts with a 3/16-inch (5

bolts with a

mm)

drill bit

and

screw extractor

then verify that the

LOCK, ACC, ON and START

der housing to the steering column, then

each bolt with a 3/16-inch (5

positions.

unscrew them with a screw

KEY LOCK CYLINDER

Remove

8

mm)

drill

drill bit

a hole

in

the center of

(see illustration) and

extractor.

the key lock cylinder

assembly from the steering col-

umn. Before tightening the

9

Refer to illustration 8.7

new shear-head

bolts, insert the ignition

key and verify that the steering wheel lock mechanism functions cor-

6

Disconnect the ignition switch

electrical

connector and the con-

nectors for the ignition key lock cylinder, the immobilizer control unit/receiver

and the

ignition key lock cylinder/key light (see illustra-

9

and

that the ignition key turns freely in the key lock cylinder.

10

bolts until the

heads break

off.

When

Installation is otherwise the reverse of removal.

you're

done, reconnect the cable to the negative battery terminal and perform

tion 8.3).

7

rectly

Then tighten the shear-head

Center-punch the shear-head bolts that secure the key lock cylin-

Dashboard switches

-

the

PCM

idle learn

procedure (see Chapter

5,

Section

1).

replacement

WARNING: The models covered by this manual are equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), more commonly known as airbags. Always disable the airbag system before working in the vicinity of any airbag system component to avoid the possibility of accidental deployment of the airbag, which could cause

9.3a To detach the driver's pocket trim

personal injury (see Section 25).

panel, remove this retaining screw, pull

out the driver's

pocket assembly

COUPE AND SEDAN

.

.

Switches in driver's pocket (cruise control, moonroof and power mirrors) I Refer to illustrations 9.3a, 9.3b

and 9.4 2

1

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see

Chapter ing.

5,

Section

1),

then wait at least three minutes before proceed-

Remove

panels

3

-

the driver's dashboard under cover (see

removal and

Open

remove the

installation in

the "driver's pocket," driver's

Chapter

remove the

1 1

Dashboard trim

).

retaining screw

pocket assembly (see illustrations).

and

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-10

9.3b

.

.

.

then depress the release tab on each electrical

9.4 To release a switch from the driver's pocket trim panel,

depress the locking spring or tab with a small screwdriver

connector and pull out the connectors

from the backside 4

To remove the cruise control, moonroot or power mirror switch,

of the trim panel, then

through the front side

of the

push out the switch

panel

simply depress the release tab on top and push the switch out from the backside of the trim piece (see 5

Rear window defogger switch

illustration).

Installation is the reverse of removal.

When

you're done, recon-

nect the cable to the negative battery terminal, then perform the

procedure (see Chapter

idle learn ify

that the switch that

5,

Section

you replaced works

1). Finally,

PCM

be sure to ver-

correctly.

6

7

5,

at least three

Chap-

ter 5,

electrical

connector from the hazard flasher

window

conditioning con-

3).

1),

then wait

Remove

10

Installation is the reverse of removal.

the hazard flasher switch (see illustration).

When

procedure (see Chapter

that the hazard flasher switch

5,

Section

works

9.4), then

you're done, recon-

1). Finally,

PCM

be sure to ver-

correctly.

driver's

at least three

minutes before proceeding.

dashboard lower cover (see Chapter

11).

14 Depress the release tabs on the cruise control switch or moonroof switch

9

nect the cable to the negative battery terminal, then perform the

ify

Section

13 Remove the

switch (see illustration).

idle learn

assembly (see Chapter

air

12 Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see Chap-

the center trim panel from the dashboard (see

Disconnect the

an integral part of the heater

Cruise control switch or moonroof switch

minutes.

ter 11).

8

is

CR-V

Section 1) and wait

Remove

window defogger switch

conditioning control assembly. To replace the rear

and 9.9

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see

Chapter

air

defogger switch, you must replace the heater and trol

Hazard flasher switch I Refer to illustrations 9.8

11 The rear

and

15

and push the switch out

of the trim panel (see illustration

disconnect the electrical connector from the switch.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

When

you're done, recon-

nect the cable to the negative battery terminal, then perform the idle learn ify

procedure (see Chapter

5,

that the cruise control switch or

Section

1). Finally,

be sure

moonroof switch works

PCM to ver-

correctly.

9.9 To separate the hazard flasher switch from the center 9.8 To disconnect the electrical connector from the

hazard flasher switch, depress this release tab and pull off the

connector

trim panel, depress these two locking tabs with a small

screwdriver from the backside of the trim panel and push out the switch through the front of the trim panel

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Rear window defogger switch

Hazard flasher switch

31 The rear window defogger switch

16 Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see Chapter

5,

Section

1),

then wait at least three minutes before proceed-

and

17 Remove the center trim panel (see Chapter 11). electrical

conditioning control assembly (see

air

3).

Cruise control main switch 32 Disconnect the cable from the negative

19 Depress the release tabs, then push out the hazard flasher switch

Chapter

illustration 9.9).

When

Installation is the reverse of removal.

you're done, recon-

nect the cable to the negative battery terminal, then perform the

ify

an integral part of the heater

connector from the hazard flasher switch

from behind the center trim panel (see

procedure (see Chapter

idle learn

is

conditioning control assembly. To replace the defogger switch,

Chapter

(see illustration 9.8).

20

air

you must replace the heater and

ing.

18 Disconnect the

12-11

that the hazard flasher switch

Section

5,

works

1). Finally,

Section

1),

battery terminal (see

then wait at least three minutes before proceed-

ing.

PCM

33 Remove the

driver's

dashboard lower cover (see Chapter

34 Reach underneath the dash and disconnect the

be sure to vertor

correctly.

5,

11).

connec-

electrical

from the cruise control main switch.

35 Depress the cruise control main switch release tabs with a small

Seat heater switches 21

screwdriver and push the switch out of the dashboard from the back-

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see

Chapter

5,

Section

1),

side of the dash.

22 Remove the

driver's

dashboard lower cover (see Chapter

23 Reach underneath the dash and disconnect the

When

you're done, recon-

electrical

11).

idle learn

connec-

ify

procedure (see Chapter

that the cruise control

5,

Section

1). Finally,

main switch works

PCM

be sure to ver-

correctly.

from the seat heater switch.

24 Depress the driver

seat heater switch release tabs with a small screw-

and push the switch out

of the

dashboard from the backside

25

37 Disconnect the cable from the negative Chapter

Installation is the reverse of removal.

When

you're done, recon-

nect the cable to the negative battery terminal, then perform the idle learn

Power mirror switch

of

the dash.

ify

Installation is the reverse of removal.

nect the cable to the negative battery terminal, then perform the

ing.

tor

36

then wait at least three minutes before proceed-

procedure (see Chapter

that the seat heater switch

5,

works

Section

1). Finally,

5,

Section

battery terminal (see

then wait at least three minutes before proceed-

ing.

PCM

38 Remove the

driver's pocket.

39 Reach through the opening

be sure to ver-

release tabs on the

correctly.

1),

for the driver's pocket,

depress the

power mirror switch and push the switch out

of the

dash from the backside.

HATCHBACK

40 Disconnect

the electrical connector from the

41 Installation

is

the reverse of removal.

When

power mirror switch. you're done, recon-

nect the cable to the negative battery terminal, then perform the

Hazard flasher switch

idle learn

26 Disconnect the cable from the negative Chapter

5,

Section

1),

battery terminal (see

then wait at least three minutes before proceed-

ify

procedure (see Chapter

that the cruise control

5.

Section

1). Finally,

main switch works

PCM

be sure to ver-

correctly.

Moonroof switch

ing.

27 Remove the center trim panel (see Chapter

28 Disconnect the

electrical

42 Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal (see

11).

connector from the hazard warning

Chapter

switch (see illustration 9.8).

Installation is the reverse of removal.

When

44 Disconnect the

procedure (see Chapter

that the hazard flasher switch

5,

Section

works

1). Finally,

correctly.

45

you're done, recon-

nect the cable to the negative battery terminal, then perform the

ify

1),

then wait

at least three

minutes before proceed-

electrical

of the headliner.

connector from the moonroof switch

and remove the switch.

(see illustration 9.9).

idle learn

Section

43 Pry the moonroof switch out

29 Remove the two hazard warning switch mounting screws, then push out the hazard warning switch from behind the center trim panel

30

5,

ing.

PCM

be sure to ver-

Installation is the reverse of removal.

When

you're done, recon-

nect the cable to the negative battery terminal, then perform the idle learn ify

procedure (see Chapter

that the cruise control

5,

Section

main switch works

1). Finally,

correctly.

be sure

PCM to ver-

.

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-12

10 Instrument cluster

-

removal and installation

and 10.3b

I Refer to illustrations 10.3a

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal and wait

1

minutes before proceeding (see Chapter

at least three :

>

WARNING:

The models covered by this manual are equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), more commonly known as airbags. Always disable the airbag system before working in the vicinity of any airbag system component to avoid the possibility of accidental deployment of the airbag, which could cause personal injury (see Section 25).

Section

5,

1).

2

Remove

the instrument cluster trim panel (see Chapter

3

Remove

the instrument cluster retaining screws (see illustration),

1 1 ).

then pull out the cluster and disconnect the electrical connectors from the backside (see illustration).

4

Installation is the reverse of removal.

5

Reconnect the cable

the

PCM

and perform

to the negative battery terminal

procedure (see Chapter

idle learn

5,

Section

1).

When

you're

done, verify that the instrument cluster functions correctly.

then pull out the cluster and disconnect the

10.3a To detach the instrument cluster from the dashboard,

10.3b

remove these three screws

electrical connectors

.

.

.

.

.

(coupe/sedan shown, CR-V and

hatchback similar)

11

Wiper motor

-

check and replacement

WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT CHECK

the wiper switch to the HI position and check for voltage at the motor.

— Note: '•Note: Refer to the wiring diagrams for wire colors

lowing checks.

When

in

12-volt test light to each terminal at a connector until

checks

fail to

If

it

lights;

the following

3 off

If

and

in

work

slowly,

make sure

good condition (see Chapter

5).

If

the battery

the battery

is fully

is in

charged

good shape,

switch

age or pivots as necessary. Reinstall the wiper motor.

4

If

the wipers

ground connection. 2

If

Section

the wipers 3).

If

If

fail

the fuse

all

connections look OK, replace the motor.

to operate is

when

activated,

check the fuse (see

OK, connect a jumper wire between the wiper

motor's ground terminal and ground, then retest.

now, repair the ground connection.

If

the motor

If

the motor

still

works

doesn't work, turn

and no voltage

there's

is

at the

no voltage If

1).

If

the motor

to the motor,

it

the motor still

check for

there's voltage at the wiper control

wiper motor, have the switch tested.

OK, the wiper control relay

is

If

the

probably bad. See Section 5 for

If

the interval (delay) function

is

inoperative, check the continuity

the wiring between the switch and the wiper control module.

of

all

If

the wipers

fail

in

when

the switch

is

still

operate slowly, check for loose or corroded connections, especially the

If

If

relay testing.

remove the wiper motor (see below) and operate the wiper arms by hand. Check for binding linkage and pivots. Lubricate or repair the link-

it.

voltage at the wiper control relays. relays

the wipers

8).

remove the motor and check

works, check for binding linkage (see Step

doesn't work, replace

facility. If

there's voltage at the connector,

the vehicle with fused jumper wires from the battery.

now

locate the problem, have the system diagnosed by

a dealer service department or other properly equipped repair

1

the hood seal and cowl covers (see Step 7) and

the fol-

checking for voltage, probe a grounded

this verifies voltage (power) at the terminal.

Remove

disconnect the electrical connector (see Step

5

"off" position), turn

ON, then check nector.

If

to "park"

turned

off

(if

they stop at the position that they're

instead of returning to their normal

the wiper switch to

OFF and

the ignition switch to

for voltage at the park feed wire of the

no voltage

is

present, check for an

wiper motor and the fuse panel.

open

wiper motor con-

circuit

between the

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-13

.

WIPER MOTOR REPLACEMENT Windshield wiper motor I Refer to illustrations 11.6, 11.8, 11.9a, 11.9b, 11.9c, 11. 9d

and 11.10

Remove

6

remove the tion to

its

the windshield wiper

nuts.

Be sure

to

arm

retaining nut covers

mark the position

of

and then

each wiper arm

in rela-

splined shaft (see illustration), then remove the wiper arms.

7

Remove

the

8

Remove

the windshield wiper linkage/motor assembly mounting

hood

seal

and cowl covers (see Chapter

1 1

).

bolts (see illustration), then disconnect the electrical connector

from the

windshield wiper motor. 9

Separate the windshield wiper linkage from the wiper motor (see

illustrations).

10 Remove the windshield wiper motor mounting bolts (see tion)

11

and separate the motor from

its

Before installing the windshield wiper linkage (especially

installing the old linkage),

illustra-

mounting bracket.

11 .6 Pry off the trim caps and remove the windshield wiper if

you're

be sure to grease the moving parts.

arm arm

retaining nuts, then

mark the relationship of each wiper removing the arm

to its splined shaft before

11.8 To detach the windshield wiper linkage/motor assembly

11.9a Mark the relationship of the linkage arm and the

from the cowl area, remove these three bolts

motor mounting bracket

to

ensure that the arm

is

correctly

realigned during reassembly

11 .9b To separate the windshield wiper linkage from

11.9c Using an adjustable wrench (shown) or a pair of large

the linkage arm, pry the two halves of the spherical

adjustable pliers to immobilize the linkage arm, loosen the

bearing apart

arm

retaining nut and

remove the arm from the motor

shaft

12-14

11. 9d

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Mark the relationship of the linkage arm remove the arm from the shaft

motor

to the

12 the

Installation is otherwise the reverse of removal.

13 Reconnect the cable the

Be sure

to align

marks you made between the linkage arm and the motor mounting

bracket and between the windshield wiper

PCM

idle learn

in all

shaft.

to the negative battery terminal, then

14 Turn on the windshield wipers and operates correctly

arm and the motor

procedure (see Chapter

modes

5,

Section

11.10 To detach the windshield wiper motor from

its

mounting bracket, remove these three bolts

shaft, then

perform

wiper motor

(see your owner's manual

tion to

its

nut.

Be sure

if

necessary).

arm

of the wiper

in rela-

arm.

connector from the rear window wiper

electrical

motor.

18 Remove the three wiper motor mounting 19 Remove the

Rear window wiper motor

mark the position

to

splined shaft (see illustration 11.6), then remove the wiper

17 Disconnect the

1).

verify that the

16 Remove the windshield wiper arm retaining nut cover, then

remove the

20

rear

window wiper

bolts.

motor.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

15 Open the hatch. Remove the hatch trim panel (see Chapter 11).

12 Radio and speakers

-

removal and installation

COUPE AND SEDAN

WARNING: The models covered by this manual are equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), more commonly known as airbags. Always disable the airbag system before working in the vicinity of any airbag system component to avoid the possibility of accidental deployment of the airbag, which could cause personal injury (see Section 25).

Radio I Refer to illustration 12.2

—Note: Before beginning have the

down

code

anti-theft

and 12.3

make sure that you and that you have written

this procedure,

for the radio

the frequencies for the radio station preset buttons.

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal and wait

1

at least three

minutes before proceeding (see Chapter

Remove

2

11), then disconnect the antenna

back

the radio from

and the

electrical

1).

connector from the

the radio mounting bolts (see illustration) and its

Installation is the reverse of removal.

5

Reconnect the cable

PCM

remove

mounting bracket.

4

the

Section

of the radio (see illustration).

Remove

3

5,

the center trim panel from the dashboard (see Chapter

idle learn

to the negative battery terminal

procedure (see Chapter

5,

Section

and perform

1).

Speakers Tweeters

12.2 Pull out the center trim panel and disconnect the electrical connector of the radio

and antenna cable from the backside

6

Remove

7

Disconnect the

8

Remove

the mirror

9

Remove

the tweeter retaining screw

the front door trim panel (see Chapter

10 Installation

is

electrical

1 1 ).

connector from the tweeter.

mount cover

(see Chapter

1 1 ).

and remove the

the reverse of removal.

tweeter.

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12.3 To detach the radio unit from

its

mounting bracket, remove the two bolts from

12.12 Carefully pry the front door

12.13 Disconnect the electrical

speaker out

connector from the front door speaker

of the

door with a panel

and remove the speaker

removal tool (shown) or with a large

each side

12-15

screwdriver (pry only at the top) Front door speakers I Refer to illustrations 12.12 11

Remove

and 12.13

the front door trim panel (see Chapter 11).

12 Working from the

top, carefully pry the speaker out of

door (see

illustration).

13 Disconnect the

electrical

connector (see

illustration)

and remove

the speaker from the vehicle.

14

Installation is the reverse of removal.

Rear speakers I Refer to illustrations 12.16

15 Remove the

and 12.17

rear shelf trim panel (see

16 Open the trunk and disconnect the speaker (see

Chapter 11).

electrical

17 Remove the speaker mounting screws (see the speaker out of

18

connector from the

illustration).

its

12.16 To disconnect the electrical connector from a rear illustration)

and

pull

speaker, open the trunk, locate the speaker connector at the

receptacle.

front of the trunk right behind the rear seat, then

Installation is the reverse of removal.

release tabs and pull

CR-V

far,

you

will

damage

the two lower

speaker straight up to disengage

Radio —Note: Before beginning have the anti-theft code

depress the

the connector

speaker just enough to release the upper tab too

down

off

its

(if

you

mounting

pull out the

tabs).

Then

speaker

pull the

two lower mounting tabs.

make sure that you and that you have written

this procedure,

for the radio

the frequencies for the radio station preset buttons.

19 Remove the dashboard center panel (see Dashboard trim panels

removal and installation

in

Chapter

1 1

-

).

20 Remove the four radio mounting

bolts

and

pull out the radio.

21 Disconnect the electrical connector and the antenna lead from the radio.

22 four

If

you're planning to replace the radio with a

mounting bracket bolts from the

left

and

new

right radio

unit,

remove

all

mounting

brackets and remove the mounting brackets from both sides of the radio. Install these brackets

23

on the new

unit.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

Speakers Door speakers 24 Remove the door trim panel (see Chapter 25 Push down on the upper release

tab

and

11). pull out the top of the

12.17 To detach a rear speaker from the rear shelf area,

remove these three screws

1

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-16 26 Disconnect

the electrical connector from the speaker

and remove

27

tioner control

assembly and remove the center panel, the radio and the

heater/air conditioner control panel as a single assembly.

the speaker.

35 Remove the

Installation is the reverse of removal.

heater/air conditioner control panel

panel (see Chapter

Tweeters

36 Remove the four radio mounting

28 Carefully pry the tweeter speaker

loose from the dashboard,

grille

its

then remove the tweeter speaker grille and the tweeter as a single

from the center

3).

bolts

and detach the radio from

mounting brackets.

37

Installation is the reverse of removal.

assembly.

29 Disconnect the

electrical

connector from the tweeter and remove

Door speakers

the tweeter.

30

Speakers

Installation is the reverse of removal.

38 Remove 39

HATCHBACK

the door trim panel (see Chapter 11).

Pull the top of the

upper retaining

speaker straight out, just enough to release the

tab, then pull the

speaker straight up to disengage the

two lower mounting tabs and remove the speaker from the door and

Radio

disconnect the speaker electrical connector.

—Note; Betore beginning have the anti-theft code

down

make sure

this procedure,

for the radio

40

that you

and that you have written

Installation is the reverse of removal.

Tweeters

the frequencies for the radio station preset buttons. 41 Carefully pry the tweeter out of the mirror mounting trim cover.

31

Remove

panels

-

Dashboard

the driver's dashboard lower cover (see

removal and

installation in Chapter

1 1

trim

43

32 Open the glove box, remove the glove "stops" (see Glove box removal and installation

in

Chapter 11) and

let

44 Carefully pry

34 Disconnect

the electrical connector and the antenna lead from the

13 Antenna

-

connectors from the heater/air condi-

rear

window-mounted antenna

similar to the defogger grid on the rear

repair the antenna grid as long as the broken part

grid,

The procedure

for repairing the

window defogger

is

(If

Installation is the reverse of removal.

antenna grid

is

identical to

Disconnect the antenna lead

5

Remove

1 ).

antenna lead and weatherseal grommet out of the A-pil-

7

Remove

the antenna housing bracket

the antenna

8

the antenna

mast from

its

9

mounting base.

mounting nut and remove

mounting bracket assembly.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

Unscrew

the antenna nut, the

Carefully

remove the

10 Disconnect the If

Remove

mounting base and the rubber

13 Installation

rear

-

window defogger consists

in

nut.

is

the reverse of removal.

check and repair of a

number

position. Using a voltmeter, place the positive probe against the defog-

of horizontal

elements baked onto the glass surface. Small breaks

connector from the antenna.

mounting

the antenna

12 Remove the antenna.

bushing.

14 Rear window defogger

rear part of the headliner.

electrical

you're replac-

ing the entire antenna assembly, keep going.)

2

1

Pull the

HATCHBACK

Unscrew and remove

The

Chapter

installation in

6

1

1

electrical connector.

the right inner fender housing panel (see Front fender -

lar.

grid (see Section 14).

you're simply replacing the antenna mast, stop here.

3

speaker and disconnect the electrical connector.

4

removal and

no more than one

CR-V 2

Pull out the

47

window. To replace the

antenna, you have to replace the rear window. However, you can easily

repairing the rear

46

(REPAIR ONLY)

Coupes and sedans use a

inch long.

the speaker cover.

removal and installation

COUPE AND SEDAN

is

off

45 Remove the three speaker mounting screws.

radio, disconnect the electrical

1

connector from the tweeter.

Rear speakers

bolts, then pull out the

center panel.

which

electrical

Installation is the reverse of removal.

-

box hang down.

the glove

33 Remove the two center panel mounting

42 Disconnect the

).

ger grid positive terminal and the negative probe against the ground

the element can be repaired without removing

the rear window.

terminal.

If

battery voltage

switch and related wiring.

is If

not indicated, check the fuse, defogger

voltage

is

indicated, but

defogger doesn't heat, proceed with the following

CHECK

4 of

I Refer to illustrations 14.4, 14.5

3

and 14.7

Turn the ignition switch and defogger system switches to the

When measuring

aluminum

press the

ON

tion).

foil

foil

all

or part of the

tests.

voltage during the next two tests, wrap a piece

around the

tip of

the voltmeter positive probe and

against the heating element with your finger (see illustra-

Place the negative probe on the defogger grid ground terminal.

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

When measuring

14.4

window

the voltage at the rear

aluminum

14.5 To determine

a heating

if

12-17

element has broken, check

the voltage at the center of each element;

if

positive probe of the voltmeter and press the foil against the

or 6-volts, the element

the voltage

wire with your finger

12-volts, the

element

ground side.

If

defogger grid, wrap a piece

ot

foil

around the

there

is

is

is

unbroken, but

if

the voltage

is

is

5

10 or

broken between the center and the

no voltage, the element

is

broken

between the center and the positive side

5

Check

the voltage at the center of each heating element (see

the voltage

illustration).

If

no break).

the voltage

If

is

is

5 or 6-volts, the element

zero, the

element

is

is

REPAIR

okay (there

is

broken between the cenI

ter of

the element and the positive end.

the element

is

If

the voltage

is

10

broken between the center of the element and ground.

Check each heating element. 6

Connect the negative lead

should stay the same. 7

If

it

to a

good body ground. The reading

doesn't, the

ground connection

is

bad.

it

against the heating element at the positive terminal end and

toward the negative terminal end. The point

meter deflects from several volts to zero ing element

is

broken (see

Repair the break

is

at

which the

volt-

the point at which the heat-

illustration).

most auto

in the

element using a repair

parts stores).

Make

kit

for this

sure that the repair

purpose kit

includes plastic conductive epoxy.

9

defogger ground terminal. Place the voltmeter positive probe with the

slide

8

(available at

To find the break, place the voltmeter negative probe against the

foil strip

Refer to illustration 14.13

to 12-volts

off for

Prior to repairing a break, turn off the

system and allow

it

to cool

a few minutes.

10 Lightly

buff the

element area with fine

steel

wool, then clean

it

thoroughly with rubbing alcohol. 11

Use masking tape

to

mask

off

the area being repaired.

12 Thoroughly mix the epoxy, following the instructions provided with the repair

kit.

13 Apply the epoxy material ping the

undamaged

to the slit in the

masking

tape, overlap-

area about 3/4-inch on either end (see illustration).

14 Allow the repair

to

cure for 24 hours before removing the tape

and using the system.

14.7 To find the break, place the voltmeter negative lead against the defogger ground terminal, place the voltmeter positive lead with the foil strip against the heating

the positive terminal end and slide

it

element

at

toward the negative

14.13 To use a defogger repair

terminal end. The point at which the voltmeter reading

inside of the

changes abruptly

special conductive coating

is

the point at which the element

is

broken

window

at the

kit,

apply masking tape to the

damaged

area, then brush on the

.

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-18

15 Headlight bulb

-

replacement

THROUGH 2003 COUPE AND SEDAN, 2002 THROUGH 2004 CR-V AND 2002 AND 2003 HATCHBACK

2

2001

If

you're going to replace the

power steering reservoir from up, then set

it

aside (do

Disconnect the

3

NOT

its

left

headlight bulb, remove the

mounting bracket by pulling

it

straight

disconnect any power steering hoses!).

electrical

connector from the headlight (see

illus-

tration).

> Refer to illustrations 15.3, 15.4, 15.5a and 15.5b

Remove

4

the rubber weather seal from the headlight housing (see

illustration).

** WARNING:

Disengage the headlight bulb retainer wire, then remove the bulb

5

from the headlight housing (see

bulbs are under pressure and can shatter if the surface is scratched or the bulb is dropped. Wear eye protection and handle the bulbs carefully, grasping only the base whenever possible. Do not touch the surface of the bulb with

Halogen gas

filled

your fingers because the oil from your skin could cause it to overheat and fail prematurely. If you do touch the bulb surface, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

1

Make

both turned

sure that the headlight switch and the ignition switch are off,

of the

new bulb

fingers, insert the bulb into the headlight assembly.

with your bare

Make

sure that the

three metal tabs on the bulb (see illustration 15.5a) are aligned with the three slots in the plastic mounting base and that the bulb mounting

flange

7

seated against the base.

is fully

Swing the bulb

with

its slot.

8

Install

9

Plug

in

10 Verify

retainer wire

back

into place

and engage the end

the rubber weather seal on the back of the headlight

assembly (see

then open the hood.

illustrations).

Without touching the glass part

6

illustration).

the electrical connector.

that the

new

headlight bulb operates correctly.

15.3 Disconnect the electrical connector from the headlight

assembly (coupe/sedan shown, CR-V and hatchback similar)

Remove the rubber weather seal from the headlight assembly (coupe/sedan shown, CR-V and hatchback similar) 15.4

15.5a Before removing the old headlight bulb, note

how

the

three metal tabs on the bulb mounting flange are aligned with their respective slots in the headlight

mounting base. To disengage the headlight bulb retainer wire from the headlight assembly, lift the right end of the wire up and out of its slot .

15.5b to

.

.

.

then swing the wire retainer to the

remove the retainer

-

it's

hinged on the

left

left

(don't try

side) and pull

the headlight bulb out of the headlight assembly

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 2004 COUPE, SEDAN

AND HATCHBACK

12 Disconnect the

12-19

connector trom the headlight bulb socket.

electrical

13 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 45-degrees and 11

Make sure

both turned

oft,

that the headlight switch

and the

ignition switch are

then open the hood.

16 Headlights

-

pull

it

out.

14

Installation is the reverse of removal.

5

Adjustment should be made with the vehicle parked 25

adjustment

I Refer to illustrations 16.1

and 16.3

the wall, sitting level, the gas tank half-full

#* CAUTION:

and no heavy load

feet in

from

the

vehicle.

With the low beams turned on, position the high intensity zone

6

The headlights must be aimed correctly. If adjusted incorrectly they could blind the driver of an oncoming vehicle and cause a serious accident or seriously reduce your ability to see the road. The headlights should be checked for correct aim every 12 months and any time a new headlight is installed or front end body work is performed. It should be emphasized that the following procedure is only an interim step that will provide temporary adjustment until a properly equipped shop can adjust

so

it

is

two inches below the horizontal

line.

With the high beams on, the high intensity zone should be

7

below the horizontal

cally centered with the exact center just

-Note:

verti-

line.

might not be possible to position the headlight aim

It

exactly for both high and low beams.

made, keep

in

mind

that the low

a

If

beams

compromise must be

are the most used and

have the greatest effect on safety.

the headlights.

8

If

you have any

difficulty adjusting the headlights,

have them

adjusted by a dealer service department as soon as possible.

The

1

vertical adjuster (see illustration) is located

on the upper

backside of each headlight housing. Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the adjusters. (There are

no horizontal adjustment screws.)

There are several methods for adjusting the headlights. The sim-

2

'

plest

method requires masking

tape, a blank wall

and a

'

level floor.

' i

i

i

'

|

3

Position masking tape vertically on the wall

in relation to

the

»

and

in relation to

,

(see illustration).

4

Floor to Center of

Position a horizontal tape line in reference to the centerline of

all

~Note:

r~T

might be easier to position the tape on the wall with the vehicle parked only a few inches away. It

H-

i

.

T~~T

I

',

i

i

i

I

.

'

I

.I

. '

' |

|

1

1

rh

.1—.LH.

Center of Vehicle to Center of Headlamp Lens

LZJ

EZI

D'ZE

TZ2 l

i

i

i

'.

" I

IZ3

TT~T

I&E

i

,

I

I

Headlamp Lens j;

the headlights.

'

i

Area

,

the centerlines of both headlights

^

High-Intensity

L-

I

,

vehicle centerline

i

—

l

I.I

n r-rE III I

'

i

i

i

i

i

i

—

i

i

i

25 FT

Vehicle Centerline

Front of

Headlamp

llfl"l

160029-12-19.3

16.1 The vertical adjuster of

is

located on the upper backside

each headlight housing (coupe/sedan shown, CR-V and

hatchback similar)

16.3 Headlight adjustment details

HAY N ESI

.

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-20

17 Headlight housing

-

replacement

* Refer to illustrations 17.3a, 17.3b and 17.5

Make sure

1

turned

that the headlight switch

and the

ignition switch are

off.

2

Remove

the front

3

Remove

the headlight housing mounting bolts (see illustrations).

4

Disconnect the

nal

and parking

5

If

bumper cover

electrical

(see Chapter

1 1

).

connectors from the headlight, turn sig-

light bulbs.

you're replacing the headlight housing, detach the corner

bumper beam

(the small black metal piece that's attached to the

side of the headlight housing (see illustration) and install

it

under-

on the new

headlight housing unit.

6

Installation is the reverse of removal.

17.3a To detach the headlight housing assembly, remove the

two upper mounting bolts

17.3b ... and the two lower mounting bolts (coupe/sedan shown, CR-V and hatchback similar, except that CR-V has two mounting bolts at the outer end of the corner upper beam instead of one bolt as

18 Horn

-

.

.

17.6 To detach the corner bumper of the headlight housing,

remove

beam from

this bolt

the underside

(coupe/sedan

shown, CR-V and hatchback similar)

shown here)

replacement

I Refer to illustration 18.3 1

Raise the front of the vehicle and place

2

Remove

the front

3

There

one horn (see

is

are two horns on

4

bumper cover

it

securely on jackstands.

(see Chapter

illustration)

1 1 ).

on coupes and sedans. There

CR-Vs and on hatchbacks, one below each

Disconnect the

electrical

connector from the horn (see

headlight. illustra-

tion 18.3).

5

Remove

the horn mounting bracket bolt (see illustration 18.3)

and remove the horn. 6

Installation is the reverse of removal.

18.3 On coupes and sedans (shown), the horn

is

located

remove the horn, simply disconnect the electrical connector and remove the mounting bracket bolt (on CR-Vs and hatchbacks there are two horns, one below each headlight, and they're virtually identical to below the

this unit)

left

headlight. To

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1

2-21

19 Bulb replacement

COUPE AND SEDAN

counterclockwise (see illustration) and pull

Remove

4

it

out of the housing.

the turn signal bulb from the bulb holder.

On 2001

through 2003 models, simply pull the bulb straight out of

Exterior light bulbs

(see illustration). To install a

Front turn signal/side marker and parking light bulb(s) I

vehicle and place

left it

or right tront wheel lug nuts. Raise the front of the

securely on jackstands.

Remove

the

left

or right

Remove

Front fender 3 light

-

the front part of the

removal and

left

or right inner fender liner (see

installation in

Chapter

illustration).

Disconnect the

from the front turn signal bulb holder (see

electrical

illustration) or

connector

from the front

parking light bulb holder. To remove the bulb holder, simply turn

19.3a After removing the front part of the inner

fender

liner, locate

the

it

it

counterclockwise, then pull

bulb,

push

give

a clockwise turn to lock

it

it

it

it

holder

for everything. it

until

it's

seated, then

into place in the holder.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

High-mount brake

light

it

> Refer to illustration 19.6

6

Open

the trunk and look for the electrical connector for the high-

mount brake area, just

light,

ahead

which

is

located

in

the underside of the rear shelf

of the trunk light (see illustration).

19.3b Disconnect the electrical

19.3c To remove the bulb holder for

connector from the front turn signal

the turn signal/side marker bulb

marker bulb holder

electrical connector for the front turn

light/side

signal light bulb (A) or for the front

(shown) or from the parking

parking light bulb (B) (2001 through

bulb holder

holder (shown) or for the parking light bulb holder from the headlight

light

housing, turn

2003 coupe/sedan shown; 2004 coupe/sedan uses a single bulb

and

pull

it

it

counterclockwise

out of the housing

for everything)

19.4 To remove the front turn signal/side marker bulb or the

19.6 Disconnect the electrical connector from the high-

front parking light bulb

mount brake

from

its

holder on a 2001 through

2003 coupe or sedan, grasp the holder firmly and bulb straight out

To

into the

out of the holder. To

bulb holder

into the

a

its

straight into the bulb

1 1 ).

Locate the front turn signal bulb holder and the front parking

bulb holder (see

new

install

5

front wheel.

2

push

remove the bulb from the holder on a 2004 model, push holder, rotate

Loosen the

bulb,

2004 models have a single bayonet-type bulb

holder.

Refer to illustrations 19.3a, 19.3b, 19.3c and 19.4 1

new

pull the

light

bulb holder, then turn the bulb holder

counter-clockwise to remove light

housing

it

from the high-mount brake

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-22

19.16 To gain access taillight bulbs,

19.11 To remove the bulb holder for

these two release tabs and pull the

difficulty pulling

holder out of the license plate light (it's

remove the

not necessary to disconnect

located

the electrical connector)

carpeting

third screw,

which

in

peel back the

the trunk, you'll see two

bulb holders: the upper bulb holder

back the carpeting,

down near

When you

19.17

screws and carefully peel back the molded carpeting (if you have

either license plate light, depress

lens

to the outer

remove these two

for the brake/tail/rear side

is

light bulb

the floor of

and the lower holder

either bulb holder, simply turn

counterclockwise and pull

Disconnect the

To remove the bulb holder from the high-mount brake

assembly 9

electrical

rotate the bulb holder

counterclockwise and pull

it

light

new

push

bulb,

it

it

straight into the

I Refer to illustrations 19.16

16 To access the outer

After peeling

illustration).

Installation is the reverse of removal.

light

it

plate bulb

the trunk

you wish

and locate the

electrical

connector for the license

to replace (see illustration).

of the holder (see illustration 19.11) to disconnect the electrical

remove the

and

pull

15

out.

(It's

in

order to

holder.)

install a

new bulb

the vehicle's rear fender), illustration).

see two bulb holders (see

you'll

for the brake/tail/rear side

marker

the turn signal light bulb. To

taillight, rotate

the holder counter-

out. taillight

bulb from

its

holder, pull

it

straight

20

install

a bulb

in its

socket,

push

it

straight into the socket.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

not necessary

connector from the bulb holder

Taillight bulbs (in trunk lid)

I Refer to illustration 19.21

13 To remove the bulb from the socket,

14 To

it

(in

out.

19 To

12 To remove the bulb holder depress the release tabs on the sides

is

is for

remove a bulb holder from an inner

18 To remove an inner

Open

bulbs

back the carpeting,

lower bulb holder

clockwise and pull

I Refer to illustration 19.11 11

taillight

The upper bulb holder

light bulb; the

License plate

and 19.17

detach and peel back the trunk carpeting (see

17

bulb holder.

10

it

out

out.

To remove the old bulb from the bulb holder simply pull

straight out of the holder. To install a

it

Taillight bulbs (in rear fender)

connector from the bulb holder.

7

is for

the turn signal light bulb. To remove

the trunk)

8

is

marker

in the

pull

holder push

it

it

straight out.

straight into the holder.

Installation is the reverse of removal.

21

Open

back-up

the trunk

light

lid

bulbs (see

and locate the bulb holders

19.25 To remove the lens from the ceiling 19.21 The bulb holders for the taillight and back-up light bulbs are in the trunk lid

off

light,

with a small screwdriver. Be careful not to

plastic trim

for the taillight

and

illustration).

around the edge

of the lens

simply pry

damage

the

it

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-23

19.29 To remove the lens for the 19.26 To remove the old bulb from

spotlight or the lens for the ceiling

the ceiling light, simply pull

light/spotlight, carefully pry

straight out of the

it

with a fingernail

two metal clips

file

it

19.30 To remove a bulb from a

loose

spotlight assembly, pull

or with a

it

out of the

two metal clips

small screwdriver

22 To remove

either bulb holder, turn

it

counterclockwise and pull

it

out.

23 To remove

either bulb

from

its

bulb holder, simply pull

it

straight

out of the holder.

24 To

bulb

install either

in its

bulb holder, push

it

straight into the

holder.

"dome light." Models with a moonroof are equipped with a combination ceiling light/spotlight, which has three bulbs. Although the lenses are removed the same way on both types of lights, they don't use the same types of bulbs. Models with a moonroof use bulbs of a later design that are easier to remove and install (simply pull out the old bulb and push in the new one). conventional

29 Carefully pry

Interior lights Ceiling light

(dome

light)

30 Remove the old » Refer to illustrations 19.25 and 19.26

25 Using a illustration).

fingernail

Be

file

damage

the plastic trim

two metal

28

31

Install

a

new

bulb.

On models

that the bulb is fully seated in the

26 Remove the old bulb from the two metal Install the

On models without

new

bulb.

Make

sure that

it's

clips (see illustration).

fully

seated between the

19.26). its

Make

sure that

it

snaps back

into place.

If

the vehicle

is

receptacle and push

32

clips.

Install the lens.

file

or with a small

Install

the lens.

it

straight

Make sure

Hazard flasher switch

33 Remove

I Refer to illustrations 19.29 and 19.30

Models without a moonroof (as shown here) are equipped with a spotlight, which has two bulbs that look

19.34a To remove the illumination bulb from the hazard flasher switch, unscrew it .

.

without a moonroof,

two metal clips (see

up

until

that

it

it

its

On models receptacle.

make sure

illustration

insert the bulb into

stops.

snaps

into place.

light bulb

and 19.34b

the hazard flasher switch (see Section 9).

34 Unscrew and remove the

• Note:

illustration).

equipped with a moonroof,

I Refer to illustrations 19.34a

Spotlight or ceiling light/spotlight

a moonroof, pull the

down from

with a moonroof, simply pull the bulb straight

around the edge

of the lens.

27

bulb.

bulb out from the two metal retaining clips (see

or a small screwdriver, pry off the lens (see

careful not to

the lens with a fingernail

off

screwdriver (see illustration).

light

bulb from the

left

side of the haz-

ard flasher switch (see illustrations). like a

35

Installation is the reverse of removal.

19.34b ... and

pull

it

out with a pair of tweezers or with a

pair of small needle-nose pliers

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-24

19.36 To remove the trunk

light lens, carefully pry

it

19.37 To remove the old bulb from the trunk

loose

assembly,

from the trunk

push

it

pull

it

in until

it

light lens

new

straight out; to install a

bulb,

stops

Trunk light bulb 49

I Refer to illustrations 19.36 and 19.37

36 Open the

trunk.

37 To remove 38 To

39

install

Install the

Remove

a

new

bulb,

51

the trunk light lens (see illustration).

the old bulb pull

push

it

straight in until

it

end

straight out (see illustration).

Make

trunk light lens.

Pull the license plate light bulb straight out of

50 Push the new bulb

sure that

it

stops.

snaps

it

Place the lens

until

it

snaps

into the socket until

position,

in

left

end

first,

it's

its

socket.

fully seated.

then push on the right

into place.

Taillight bulbs

into place.

52 Open the light

CR-V

assembly

ers, carefully

tailgate.

Each

of the

two mounting screws

for

each

tail-

hidden by a trim cover. To remove the two trim cov-

is

pry

off

each

of

them with

a small flat-tipped screwdriver.

Put a piece of tape or a clean shop rag over the

tip to

protect the finish

Exterior lights on the trim covers, then use the

Front side marker/turn signal light bulb

40 The bulb

electrical

connector for the tront side marker/turn signal

located near the headlight bulb connector.

is

replacing the bulb or

53 Remove the two

is

The procedure

similar to the procedure for doing so on a

sedan (see Steps 3 and

light

coupe

Remove

41

42 The bulb

electrical

replacing the bulb or

connector

is

marker/turn signal light

for the front side

The procedure

similar to the procedure for doing so on a

sedan (see Steps 3 and

High-mount brake

for

coupe

56 To

push

in

install a

57 To

install

socket into

4).

light

tailgate.

its

58 When

bulb

To remove the high-mount brake

on the tabs on the ends

it

To remove any

light bulb.

counterclockwise and pull

its

socket simply pull

it

of

out.

it

straight out of the

of the

housing and

light

pull off the

new bulb

in its

socket simply push

it

straight into the

socket.

on the

43 Open the

off.

socket.

located near the outer edge of the grille.

is

it

assembly mounting screws and remove

bulb and the back-up

light

55 To remove a bulb from

the radiator cover.

each cover to pry

are four bulbs in the taillight assembly. They are, from top

the bulb sockets, simply turn

Front parking light bulbs

in

to bottom, the turn signal light bulb, the brake light bulb, the side

marker/running

4).

provided

the taillight assembly.

54 There

tor

taillight

slot

housing,

hous-

a bulb socket into the taillight assembly insert the

receptacle and give

installing the taillight

taillight

it

a quarter-turn clockwise.

assembly make sure the locator pins

assembly are aligned with

their respective holes in the

pillar.

59

Installation is otherwise the reverse of removal.

ing.

44 To remove the bulb

holder, turn

it

counterclockwise and pull

Interior lights

it

out.

Ceiling light and cargo area light bulbs

45 To remove the bulb from the 46 To 47 To snaps

install install

the

new bulb

in

holder, pull

it

the holder, push

the housing place

it

in

straight out. it

straight

position and push

it

60

If

you're replacing a ceiling light

(dome

light) bulb, carefully

pry

in.

on

on the until

rear

edge

of the lens with a small flat-tipped screwdriver

and

it

remove the

into place.

lens. (Don't pry

on the housing around the

lens.)

If

you're

replacing a cargo area light bulb, pry on the front edge of the lens.

License plate 48 Pry

off

between the

light bulb

61 The ceiling light and cargo area light bulbs are identical. To

the lens by inserting a small flat-tipped screwdriver

right

edge

of the lens

and the housing. To protect the lens

from scratches, put a clean shop rag over the put a piece of duct tape on the

tip.

tip of

the screwdriver or

remove an old bulb, 62 To

install a

pull

it

straight

new bulb push

it

down. straight

up

until

it's

fully

the two metal tabs.

63

Install the lens.

Make sure

that

it

snaps

into place.

seated

in

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 90

Spotlight bulbs

64 Pry on the

edge

front

65

of the lens with a small flat-tipped

bad spotlight bulb straight down

Pull the

screw-

66 Push the new spotlight bulb

straight

up

remove

to

until

it's

Open

Install the lens.

Hazard switch

Make sure

that

it

snaps

remove the trim covering the high-mount

brake light assembly, put your fingers between the trim and the hatch

down on

glass, then carefully pull

light bulb

68 Remove the center panel and

pull out the

hazard flasher switch

92 To remove the bulb holder from the high-mount brake

69 Remove the illumination bulb from

the side of the hazard flasher

assembly push the tabs on both sides and

new

Install

71

Install the

illumination bulb

in

94 To

light in the

upper

install

new bulb

a

it

straight out of the

two metal

new bulb simply push

it

into the

assembly

their

corresponding holes

the

in

two metal tabs license plate light assembly, slide the lens to the

fully seated.

end pops out

left

98 To remove the

lens from the bulb socket pull on the lens and

squeeze the tabs on both sides

Exterior lights

Fender

remove the holding

removal and

-

clip

installation in

socket

Chapter

back the inner fender cover.

until

it

until

the

it

new bulb

unlocks, then pull

102 To

install the license plate light

assembly

the socket

in

it

it

in

and turn

it

into place until

it

left

end

slide the right

end

until the

of

assembly

snaps

Side turn signal bulbs

out.

push

it

into place.

it

in

and turn

it

clock-

103 Push the

front of the side turn signal it

pops out

of the

assembly toward the

rear

body.

104 To remove the bulb socket from the

Front parking light bulbs

lens, turn the socket

coun-

terclockwise. locate the electrical connector for the front

105 To remove the old bulb from the bulb socket,

pull

it

straight out.

next to the headlight bulb connpctor.

is

81 To remove the bulb socket from the housing, turn

106 To it

install

a

new bulb

in

the socket

push

it

straight into the

counter-

socket it

assembly

and push on the

into the hole

of the vehicle until

clockwise and pull

straight into the

it

push

the lens on the bulb socket

install

stops.

80 Open the hood and

push

the socket

out.

it

new bulb

parking light bulb, which

in

stops.

it

the

78 To remove the old bulb from the socket, push

install

it

1

101 To

counterclockwise and pull

a

install

until

latches.

77 To remove the bulb socket from the headlight housing, turn

79 To

100 To

from the

necessary).

counterclockwise

time.

pull the bulb

straight out of the socket.

flat-tipped screwdriver

inner fender cover (see

Pull

same

of the socket at the

99 To remove the old bulb from the bulb socket

Front turn signal bulbs 75 Using a

of the body, then pull out the license

plate light assembly.

HATCHBACK

wise

light

License plate light bulbs the

right until the

76

high-mount brake

into the

on the trim with

clips

97 To remove the it's

straight into the holder

it

locks into place.

96 Align the it

push

the holder

in

stops.

hatch then push the trim until the clips snap into place.

tabs. install

until

ceiling.

73 Remove the bulb by pulling

74 To

it

95 Push the bulb holder

72 Open the glove box and locate the glove box

mounting

straight out of the

it

9).

Glove box light bulb

box

pull

light

the bulb holder.

the switch.

hazard flasher switch (see Section

front part of the glove

down

pull

93 To remove an old bulb from the holder

70

retaining

holder.

until

if

unsnap the trim

the trim to

clips from the hatch.

switch.

until

bulbs

light

the hatch. To

into place.

(see Section 9).

a

until the

into place.

High-mount brake

it.

fully seated.

91

67

tabbed end of the side marker assembly into the hole

Insert the

then the looped end, then press on the looped end

assembly snaps

two spotlight bulbs).

driver (right in front of the

first,

12-25

until

it

stops.

out of the housing.

82 To remove the old bulb from the socket

107 To pull

it

install the

bulb socket into the lens insert

into the hole in

it

straight out of the

the lens

and turn

it

clockwise

until

it

stops.

socket.

83 To

install

a

new bulb

108 To in

the socket push

it

install the

the hole rear end until

side turn signal assembly

in

the

body

insert

it

first.

Then push on the

front

end

until

it

snaps

into

stops.

it

place.

84

Insert the bulb socket into the parking light

clockwise to lock

it

housing and turn

it

into place.

Taillight bulbs

109 Open the hatch. Locate the trim cover

Front side marker bulbs 85 Push the

front

edge

area. To of the side

vehicle until the front edge of the lens

86 To remove the bulb socket from counterclockwise and pull

marker lens toward the rear

pops out

of the

bumper

remove the

trim cover, carefully pry

the corner of the cargo front

edge

of the

with a small flat-tipped screwdriver. cover.

110

You'll

see three bulb sockets. The upper socket

signal light bulb, the middle socket it

in

on the upper

is

for the turn

the lens, turn the bulb socket is for

the back-up light bulb and the

out.

87 To remove the old bulb from the socket

lower one pull

it

is

for the

brake

light/taillight bulb. All three

sockets are

straight out of the

removed the same way.

socket.

88 To

install

a

new bulb

in

the socket

push

111 To remove a bulb socket, turn it

it

counterclockwise and pull

it

straight into the socket out.

until

89 wise

into

straight into the socket

it

stops. Insert the

bulb socket into the lens assembly and turn

112 To remove an old bulb from it

clock-

counterclockwise until

it

stops.

until

it

unlocks.

its

socket,

push

it

in

and turn

it

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

2-26

1

113 To wise

114

a

install

until

it

new bulb

socket push

into a

115

in

and turn

it

clock-

stops.

until

assembly and turn

122 To

it

down from

the two metal

it

straight

install

a

new

it

into the metal tabs until

bulb, insert

it

snaps

into place.

locks into place.

it

121 To remove the old bulb pull tabs.

Insert the bulb socket into the taillight

clockwise

it

123 To

Install the trim cover.

place the edge with the tabs

install the lens,

push the other edge

into place until

snaps

it

then

in position,

into position.

Interior lights

Cargo area

light bulb

Front ceiling light/spotlight bulbs

124 Open the lor the front ceiling light/spotlight pry

116 To remove the lens middle of the front edge

17 To remove one

1

carefully pry

of the lens.

of the old

on the

edge

front

it

for the

cargo area

light,

of the lens with a small screwdriver. Put

a shop towel or a piece of tape on the

bulbs pull

the screwdriver to protect

tip of

down.

straight

the trim.

new bulb push

up

118 To

install

a

119 To

install

the lens, place the side with the tabs

push the other side

remove the lens

hatch. To

on the

straight

it

into place until

it

snaps

until

stops.

it

125 To remove the old bulb in

pull

it

straight out of the bulb holder.

position, then

126 To

install

a

new bulb push

it

straight into the holder until

it's

into position. fully seated.

127 To

Center ceiling light bulb 120 To remove the lens edge

of the side

20

Most

1

one

electric rear

view mirrors

-

view mirrors use two motors

to

move

5

the

for left-right adjust-

During mirror adjustment, the power mirror adjustment switch

2

turned to

ON

to the left or right side mirror.

and

left

3

all

of

functions (left-right and up-down) for both the

its

Listen carefully for the

If

sound

of the electric

1

motors running

problem with the drive mechanism inside the

-

operated motor located to the throttle

in

the engine compartment, which

body by a

cable.

beyond the scope will

of this

The system consists

of the

speed control actuator

manual, but there are

help you identify

Check the fuses (see Section

common

and

general

problems.

-

the mirror

still

doesn't work, remove the mirror and check the

there

If

is

no voltage

in

any switch position, check the

raise the

there's voltage,

If

for

remove the mirror and if

circuit

opens and shorts.

test

it

off

the vehicle

fails this test.

it

Have an assistant operate the brake

3

lights while

you check

their

control).

4 the

the brake lights don't

If

problem and

5

or stay on

all

the time, correct

system.

Visually inspect the control cable between the cruise control motor

and the 6

come on

retest the cruise control

throttle linkage for free

movement. Replace

Test drive the vehicle to determine

working.

If

it

isn't,

take

it

if

it

if

necessary.

the cruise control

to a dealer service

is

now

department or an automo-

general information mounted

in

vidual windows. Each

windows. The system consists

of

reversible.

electric motors,

the control switches, the motors, regulators, glass

mechanisms and

associated wiring.

2

If

tive electrical specialist for further diagnosis.

The power window system operates

the doors, which lower

some

3).

22 Power window system 1

8

facility.

ground connections.

operation (voltage from the brake light switch deactivates the cruise

is

range switch. The cruise control system requires diagnostic procedures

2

Test the

10

switches, the Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch and the transmission

procedures that

3).

OK, remove the power mirror adjustment switch

general information

cable, the speed control indicator light, the

that are

is

with jumper wires. Replace the mirror

mirror.

Powertrain Control Module, the speed control actuator, the speed control

7

you can hear the motors but the mirror glass doesn't move,

connected

the fuse

If

9

in

The cruise control system maintains vehicle speed with an elec-

trically

first,

do not operate and no sound comes from the mir-

check the fuse (see Section

between the mirror and the adjustment switch

Cruise control system

21

rear side

into place.

wires at the mirror for voltage.

the mirrors.

4

snaps

service department or other qualified automobile repair

right side mirrors.

there's a

it

(see Section 9). Have the switch continuity checked by a dealership

With the ignition key

(engine not running), operate the mirror adjustment

switch through

the mirrors

If

rors,

6

ments.

sends voltage

mounting hole

into the

it

until

general information

up-and-down adjustments and one

for

the lens, insert

of the lens.

Electric side

glass;

on the middle

for the center ceiling light pry

install

then push on the front side

The power windows can be lowered and raised from the master

control switch by the driver or by remote switches located at the indi-

window has

The position

and therefore the direction

3 motor

The is

a separate motor, which

of the control switch

is

determines the polarity

of operation.

circuit is protected

by a fuse and a

circuit breaker.

Each

also equipped with an internal circuit breaker, this prevents

one stuck window from disabling the whole system.

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM The power window system

4 switch

is

window

ables the switches it

the rear

the ignition

the master

power

the switch at the passenger's

listed

that

not simply a matter of

it's

If

nature, so

in

if

you

the

the

5, respectively).

If

is

If

one window

lation in Chapter 11)

nuity in the unlocked position. Replace

Door

trim panel

-

removal and

Check the wiring between

it

if

it

for continuiiy. Repair the wiring, If

window

only one

is

if

A power door

1

in

windows only

doesn't have continuity

Chapter

1

1

If

voltage

is

damage

and the fuse and

to the regulator.

damage, If

home

is

-

On some models, On

more complex, and more

troubleshooting

UNLOCK)

is

the

power door

these models, the difficult to

limited to simple

of

Power door lock systems are operated by

bi-directional sole-

The lock switches have two operating posi-

LOCK and UNLOCK. When

activated, the switch

sends a ground

and

tion.

is

activated, the control unit

be used alternately as the feed (positive) and ground side.

problems.

If

you're unable to locate the trouble

Always check the fuses

first

window

reaching the motor, check the wiring You'll

in

need

the circuit to consult

Listen for the click of the solenoids

off.

Remove

the switches

and have

for a

bad ground

at the

if

control unit

there's

and sole-

no continuity.

switches and

at the control unit.

only one lock solenoid doesn't operate, remove the trim panel

Chapter is

1

1

)

and check

operated.

One

-

removal

for voltage at the solenoid

of the wires

should have voltage

the Lock position; the other should have voltage in the Unlock posi-

If

the inoperative solenoid

If

the inoperative solenoid isn't receiving voltage, check for an

is

receiving voltage, replace the sole-

1

open or short

in

the wire between the lock solenoid

and the control

—Note: Wire harnesses typically break between the body and because repeatedly opening and closing the door fatigues

in

both directions

-

(LOCK and

and eventually breaks the wires.

general information

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system illuminates the headis

running. The only exception

is

with the

engine running and the parking brake engaged. Once the parking brake is

the

there's binding or

If

door,

Operate the door lock switches

whenever the engine

damaged and

unit.

(see Section 3 and your owners'

24 Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

lights

isn't

installation in

10

The following general guidelines should help you quickly iden-

manual). 5

not

noid.

using these guidelines, consult a dealer service department.

4

is

replace the motor.

between the switches and motors.

while the lock switch

reverses polarity to the solenoids, allowing the two sides of the circuit

typical

the regulator

from the door with the bad solenoid (see Door trim panel

Depending on which way the switch

and repair

If

noids for continuity. Repair the wiring

in

3

window up-and-down by hand

Check the wiring between the switches,

7

diag-

checks

signal to the door lock control unit to lock or unlock the doors.

tify

the

Test the switches for continuity.

6

If

to

Move

them checked by a dealer service department.

Check

tions:

operated.

with the engine

9

the doors.

instal-

at the

operating.

8

in

and

general information

repaired.

2

for voltage at the switch

the wiring diagram for the vehicle.

the wiring connections and actuators for minor faults that can be easily

noids located

remove the trim

removal and

-

lubricate, repair or replace parts, as necessary.

voltage

relay

necessary.

part of the security alarm system.

nose. Therefore,

is

trim panel

reaching the motor, disconnect the glass from the

moves up and down smoothly, 14

lock system operates the door lock actuators

power door lock system

is

Door

).

each door. The system consists of the switches, actuators,

a control unit and associated wiring. lock system

the circuit

inoperative from the main switch, try the

23 Power door lock system

mounted

in

while checking for binding and damage. Also check for binding and

the

if

installation in

the switches

13

for continuity

9

and check

regulator (see Chapter 11).

only the rear windows are inoperative, or

open

inoperative from both switches,

is

Also verify that there's

well grounded.

operate from the master control switch, check the main switch for conti-

box

for continuity.

panel from the affected door (see

power windows won't operate, always check the fuses and and

switch, but not the other,

the switch tests OK, check for a short or

can't

to a dealer service depart-

door window.

to the driver's

same window works from one

between the affected switch and the window motor.

12

below are general

problem using them, take the vehicle

relays first (see Sections 3

8

If

check the switch

main switch before proceeding.

voltage to the relay and that the relay

(see

10

motor while the switch If

7

—Note: This doesn't apply

activated, dis-

ment.

6

other control switch at the window.

problem with the passenger window or with

windows, make sure

The procedures

find the

windows and

at

11

either ot the rear

flipping the

at

there's a

when when

control panel (in the driver's door) which,

window. So

5

only operate

will

turned to ON. There's also a main switch

12-27

released, the lights will remain on as long as the ignition switch

is

on, even

if

the parking brake

is later

applied.

The DRL system supplies

reduced power to the headlights during daylight operation to prolonging headlight

life.

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-28

25 Airbag system

general information

-

Whenever working

7

GENERAL INFORMATION

ment panel or any All

1

models are equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS), more

the event of a built into the

airbags. This system

commonly known as and the

protect the driver,

head-on or

SRS

front seat passenger, frontal collision.

crash sensors mounted behind the front

along the base of the inner fender panels (2003 and airbag assemblies are

passenger's end of the dash. 2002 and

mounted

with side-impact airbags

in

later

These are pyrotechnic devices

1

for the disconnecting procedure.

depleted.

opening side (the

trim, or upholstered side) pointed

the airbag

away from your

body. Never place the airbag module on a workbench or other surface

belt pre-tensioners.

reduce the slack

that

Section

5,

Whenever handling an airbag module, always keep

8

the backs of the front seats.

These models are also equipped with seat

the key to the Lock posi-

Wait at least three minutes for the back-up power supply to be

c)

models are also equipped

Chapter

to

or

models). The

later

and turn

Disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal(s). Refer

b)

the steering wheel and inside the

mounted on

the system

tion.

pair of

bumper (2002 models)

SRS system components,

the system:

Point the wheels straight ahead

a)

in

uses a single crash sensor

It

1999 and 2001 models, or a

control unit on

must be disarmed. To disarm

designed to

is

trom serious injury

the vicinity of the steering wheel, instru-

in

of the other

with the airbag opening facing the surface. Always place the airbag

in the seat belts

module

during an impact of sufficient force to trigger the airbags.

in

a safe location with the airbag opening facing up.

electrical test

AIRBAG MODULE

SRS component

Never measure the resistance of any

9

equipment on any

or use any

components. An ohm-

of the wiring or

meter has a built-in battery supply that could accidentally deploy the airbag.

Driver's side airbag 2

The airbag

inflator

cushion (airbag) and

10 Never use

module contains a housing incorporating the

wheel. The inflator assembly

when an

this signal to the

is

of the

column under

airbag

the steering wheel carries

module. This clockspring assembly can transmit an

electrical signal regardless of steering

wheel position. The igniter

the

in

pi liar

how

wheel

to -

remove and

removal and

install

the driver's side

4

The airbag

is It

tion housing/airbag

wheel-mounted

at the

The

electrical

connectors

for the side

Never dispose of a it

for safe

live

to a dealer service

airbag

B-

impact airbags,

front seats.

module or

seat belt pre-tensioner.

department or other qualified repair shop

deployment and disposal.

igniter,

a reac-

Driver's side airbag

module and clockspring

assembly and a trim cover.

and

unit

is

is

12 Refer

considerably larger than the steer-

mounted

inside the dash,

painted to match the instrument panel and has a

when

located inside the dash, near the glove box (see below). The

top of the passenger's side of the

consists of an inflator containing an

glove box. The airbag trim cover on top of the dash

splits

removal and

AIRBAG MODULE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

The passenger's side airbag

5 ing

mounted

-

Chapter 10.

installation in

Passenger's side airbag

instrument panel.

column (see Steering wheel

on models so equipped, are located under the

Return

For information on

3

is

trim panels.

11

inflates the bag.

airbag, refer to Steering

for the driver's side airbag is located near the bot-

seat belt pre-tensioner electrical connectors are located behind the

airbag converts the electrical signal to heat and ignites the powder,

which

of the steering

disconnecting the airbag electrical connec-

first

installation in Chapter 10); the connector for the passenger's side

A

from the system.

The connector

tors.

tom

housing

expelled, inflating the bag almost

electrical signal is sent

"clockspring" on the steering

center of the steering

in the

mounted on the back

is

over a hole through which gas instantaneously

mounted

inflator unit,

welding equipment on a vehicle equipped

electrical

with an airbag without

is

to

Chapter 10, Steering wheel

-

removal and

installation,

for the driver's side airbag module and clockspring removal and instal-

above the

lation procedures.

textured and

molded seam, which

Passenger's side airbag module

the bag inflates.

Coupe, sedan and hatchback

SRS CONTROL UNIT 6

This unit supplies the current to the airbag system (and seat belt

pre-tensioners, on if

battery

started,

power

it

is

models so equipped) cut

off.

causing the "SRS"

ing correctly.

on, or

I

If

there

is

It

checks light to

this

in

the event of the collision, even

system every time the vehicle

go on, then

off,

if

the system

a fault in the system, the light will

will flash or the

dash

will

make a beeping sound.

Refer to illustrations 25.15, 25.16 and 25.17 13 Disarm the airbag system as described previously 14 Remove the glove box (see Chapter

15 Disconnect the passenger side airbag module

electrical

tor (see illustration). is

operat-

16 Remove the airbag module mounting nuts (see

illustration).

17 Working from above, carefully pry the trim cover this

connec-

is

go on and stay If

Section.

in this

11).

in

the

dash

happens,

take the vehicle to your dealer immediately for service.

loose (see illustration), then ule out of the

DISARMING THE SYSTEM AND OTHER PRECAUTIONS

lift

dash as a single assembly.

essary), carefully separate the airbag

If

necessary (and only

module from

sure to heed the precautions outlined previously

18

** WARNING: Failure to follow these precautions could result in accidental deployment of the airbag and personal injury.

mod-

the airbag trim cover and airbag

the trim cover.

in this

nec-

if

Be

Section.

Installation is the reverse of removal. Tighten the airbag

module

mounting nuts securely. 19 Reconnect the cable ter 5,

Section

to the negative battery terminal (see

Chap-

1).

20 Perform the

idle learn

procedure (see Chapter

5,

Section

1).

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-29

CR-V 21

Disarm the airbag system as described previously

22 Right above the glove box,

Removing

this panel

you'll find a small

Section.

in this

access panel.

provides access to the airbag module electrical

connector. Carefully pry the access panel from the dashboard with a

small screwdriver. Tape the end of the screwdriver to protect the dash trim.

23 Disconnect the passenger-side airbag module

electrical

connec-

tor.

24 Remove the three passenger-side airbag module mounting bracket nuts.

25 Working from above,

carefully pry the trim cover in the

loose (see illustration 25.17), then

module out

of the

lift

the airbag trim cover

dash as a single assembly.

necessary), carefully separate the airbag

If

necessary (and only

module from the

sure to heed the precautions outlined previously

26

dash

and airbag

in this

if

Be

trim cover.

Section.

module

Installation is the reverse of removal. Tighten the airbag

mounting nuts securely.

27 Reconnect the cable Section

5,

Chapter

to the negative battery terminal (see

25.15 Before removing the passenger-side airbag module, be sure to disconnect the electrical connector (coupe,

1).

28 Perform the

idle learn

procedure (see Chapter

5,

Section

sedan and hatchback) 1).

25.16 To detach the passenger-side airbag module, remove

25.17 Using a shop towel to protect the dashboard, carefully

these three nuts (coupe, sedan and hatchback)

pry loose the trim cover the cover and airbag

26 Wiring diagrams Since

it

isn't

-

possible to include

all

wiring diagrams for every year

and most commonly needed.

rectly

good condition. Make sure

and relays

tight,

checking a

circuit,

make sure

that all

with no broken or loose terminals.

is difficult to

disconnect,

it's

If

to

that the battery is cor-

charged and check the cable connections (see Chapters

When and

in

a single

lift

out

assembly

connector are locked together on one or two sides

1

and

5).

either be

depressed

small screwdriver.

If

light to find the locks.

of the

If

you're

trying to unplug a connector that's located in a dark area, use a flash-

NOT

probably because the two halves

lock(s), clean off

the connector with electronic parts cleaner, then look again.

connections are clean connector

So

unlock them, or must be released with a

to

you have a problem finding the

an

electrical

of the connector.

stop and look for the locks, which are usually small plastic tabs that

must

Prior to troubleshooting any circuits, check the fuses

ensure that they're

the top of the dash, then

general information

covered by this manual, the following diagrams are those that are typical

in

module as

pull

on the wires;

When pull

disconnecting an electrical connector, do

on the two halves

of the

connector

itself.

'

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-30

BLOWER MOTOR -UNDERDASH .FUSE/

'RELAY

BOX

L_l

ILLUMINATION ILLUMINATION

COMPRESSOR CTRLS

BLOWER CONTROLS BLOWER CONTROLS REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY n

|

KK

DEFOGGER GROUND

I

—

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY

BOX

,

(l

L

I

COMPRESSOR CTRLS IGNITION AIR

DELIVERY

AIR DELIVERY AIR DELIVERY AIR DELIVERY AIR DELIVERY

AIR DELIVERY

S-COM AIR DELIVERY

AIR DELIVERY AIR DELIVERY AIR DELIVERY AIR DELIVERY AIR

DELIVERY

AIR DELIVERY

COMPRESSOR CTRLS AIR OELIVERY

LT

GRN/BLK

AIR DELIVERY AIR DELIVERY AIR DELIVERY

AIR DELIVERY

LTGRN/RED

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR LT

-e-

GRN/BLK

4S?

ry

i*_

.

} FUSE

UNOER-MOOO

RUaBMUM BOX

]

•

=: 3 .

1

J

10

12

•=

~

LLTM

FUSE

--£;

HBMt Ml RELAY

T

1

:

15

^ HEAD LT LOW

ORLWO

[

DfcMER M

BUS

;

BRAKE LEVEL.

5HRGM

LX.EX

1

I

OONIWM

-

UM T

FOG LIGHT

u

RUSE

UNDER-OASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

">

—

^N

-

. HEADLT

HI

|

—

-

K ^ V

©^ \/

Headlight system (without Daytime Running Lights)

-

2001 through 2003 coupe/sedan

RIGHT

FOG

(?)

LIGHT

T

12-46

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

• FUSE

19

raoA

TEA 5 FUSE

15

*

I

W20A

S FUSE V 20A

17

~UNDER-DASH »

FUSE/RELAY BOX

WHT/RED

f\

FOG LIGHT FUSE

WHT INTERIOR LIGHTS

BLU

^

SYSTEM HEADLIGHT SWITCH I

COMBINATION LIGHT SWtTCH

I

SECURITY

—^^^

^

CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (OPTIONAL)

V UTERIOR

2;|

I

LEFT

©

FOG LIGHT

RIGHT

©

?

£

Z.

© © Yhi

LO

FOG

i©

LIGHT

^

JL

3AUGE *SSEVEL»

-

© © /J® FOG LIGHT

SWTTCH

u

m

Headlight system (without Daytime Running Lights)

I

2004 coupe/sedan

LIGHTS qh> SYSTEM

IT —

1

FOG LIGHT

switch LIGHT

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

L

I

12-47

M ~|

r *

i ~f

—•

ORi.HA.SH LIGHT RELAY

>

—

~r I

*

*

S

•

I

, 1 FUSE

1

«

17

**

I

HEADLIGHT RELAY 2

BOX

-

I

HEADLT LOW

I

•

}

UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY

i

^—

.

RED/WHT

1

1

HJe-T^ww (T)

'

(

GAUGE ASSEMBLY

UNOERDASH =^SE REIAI 50»

^ RED/BLK

RED/BLK

r

r'

REO/BLU

_/

.

•:•

INTERIOR LK3HTS

4—BLU -

SYSTEM

SECURrTY

CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH

©

dZD

HIGH IN

DIC J

.

LEFT HEADLIGHT

Headlight system (with Daytime Running Lights)

-

GAUGE ASSEMBLY

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

G5>

BEAM

RIGHT HEADLIGHT

2002 through 2003 hatchback

;

-

12-48

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

HOT

IN

ON

HOT AT ALL TIMES

HOT FN ON OR START ~~

JMDOU WOC FUSE/RELAY

BOX

LEFT HEADLIGHT

Headlight system (with Daytime Running Lights)

-

2004 hatchback

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

~

|

i

12-49

~ UNOERHOOD

UNOEROASH

|

FUSE/RELAY BOX

FUSE/RELAY BOX

5

INTERIOR LIGHTS

SYSTEM

|

-4-

(K—wI

I

n I

"

I

FOG

INTERIOR LIGHTS

LK3HTS

ONLY

SYSTEM HEA01 3h t switch

SECURITY -(

I

COMBMATION

CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR

LIGHT SWITCH

DRLH/LSW^ LIGHT RELAY

I

^N HEADLTHI

lY

I

MULTIPLEX

CONTROL UN tT

RIGHT

Q \/

HIGH

L?^

J

L

GAUGE ASSEMBLY

Headlight system (without Daytime Running Lights)

•

(S)

BEAM MOIC

2002 through 2003 hatchback

RIGHT HEADLIGHT

FOG LIGHT

12-50

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM HOT AT ALL TIMES

HOT AT ALL TIMES

LEFT HEADLIGHT

Headlight system (without Daytime Running Lights)

-

GAUGE ASSEMBLY

2004 hatchback

RIGHT HEADLIGHT

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1

i

J FUSE C 10A

7 -

5

UNOERHOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

F

J

t

12-51

1

t+

-*.>

-^^j^-^

l>-

V-

-*>

POWER

WNDOW MASTER SWITCH

V\

t

PASSENGER'S

*UTO UP

POWER WINDOW SWITCH

-^f

1

© POWER WINDOW CONTROL UNIT

WHT

LJ

,

YEL

BLK

BLU

DRIVERS DETECT CIRCUIT

WINDOW MOTOR

PASSENGERS UP

DN

POWER WINDOW SWITCH

PASSENGERS

POWER WINDOW MOTOR

Power window systems (2004 hatchback)

BOX

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM HOT INACC OR ON

HOT AT ALL TIMES 1

d

UNOERHOOO

.UNDEROASH

FUSE/RELAY

fa I

I

10A

12-61

T

BOX »

5 FU! C 7.5/

|

j

MULTIPLEX

CONTROL

'

I

FUSE/RELAY

BOX

UNIT |

I

CD CHANGER (ACCESSORY INSTALLED)

COIL ASSEMBLY

—

WINDOW ANTENNA (AM)

REAR WINDOW

DEFOGGER (FM ANTENNA)

REAR WINDOW BLK/YEL

SUB-ANTENNA LEAD

ANTENNA LEAD

SWOUT SWIGN ANTENNA MODULE

ILLUM

INTERIOR LIGHTS

•

BATT POWER

_^

ILLUM

INTERIOR LIGHTS

SYSTEM

GROUND

SRY/

RED

USA

^

.4.

A

DRIVERS

Sound system (coupe)

LEFT REAR

DOOR

SPEAKER

SPEAKER

PASSENGERS DOOR

SPEAKER

(EXCEPT GX)

(EXCEPT GX)

SPEAKER

RIGHT REAR

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

12-62

HOT

HOT AT ALL TIMES

IN

ACC OR ON

UNDEROASN

CONTROL UNfT MULTIPLEX ""I

5 FUSES { 75A

FUSE/RELAY

BOX

*

I

i

.V-~

BLK

YEL

CE C-'N3E»

ANTENNA LEAD

4\-E'.'.»

LEAD

SWOUT SWK3N

MfTEMM MODULE

INTERIOR LIGHTS

ILLUM

BATT

POWER

FL-

ILLUM

-

-^

INTERIOR LIGHTS

GROUND

Sound system (hatchback)

LEFT

RIGHT

REAR SPEAKER

REAR SPEAKER

PASSENGEIH DOOR SPEAKER

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM HOT

MOT AT ACL TIMES "

12-63

« ACC OR ON 1UNDERDASH

UNDERHOOD FUSE/RELAY

1

5 FUSE«

B0X

J"*.

_

J

MULTIPLEX

FUSE/RELAY

CONTROL

BOX

UNIT

YEL'

REC

WHT

3-1

CD CHANGER (ACCESSORY INSTALLED)

SU&antemm

UfTEMHA

LEAC

t

E*D

-v

RR

•

RL»

.•iTER.CR LIGHTS

ILIUM

BATT

POWER

ILLUM

-

INTERIOR LIGHTS

GROUND AUDIO UNIT

Sound system (sedan)

FRONT PASSENGERS DOOR

LEFT-

RIGHT

DRIVER'S

REAR SPEAKER

REAR SPEAKER

SPEAKER

SPEAKER

(EXCEPT GXI

(EXCEPT GX>

DOOR

—

12-64

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

HOT IN ON OR START

Ifuse ?2C »20A

" r

FR

FR

FR

MIST

FR

WIPER

WIPER

FR

WIPER PASS

WIPER

WASHER

(INT

(INT

WASHER

INPUT

(INT)

VOL-)

I

|IG1

jWPR

1

VOL+)

'.'

MULTIPLEX

CONTROL I

I

OTOR

^k

^k.

UNDERDASH FUSE/

GRN/ BLK

GRN/ BLK

WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR

Windshield wiper/washer system (coupe/sedan)

BLU/

BLU/

BLU/

GRN/

GRN

WHT/

WHT/

WHT

RED

BLK

ORG

WHT

BLU

BLU

RELAY BOX

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM HOT

IN

ON OR START "1 1

FUSE 20

30A

||G1

|"jWF r "iwpr

FR

MIST

FR

FR

WIPER PASS

WIPER

WASHER

INPUT

(INT)

WASHER MOTOR

|

MULTIPLEX

CONTROL UNIT

!

^

*i

UNDERDASH FUSE/RELAY GRN/ BLK

GRN/ BLK

BLU/

BLU/

BLU/

WHT

RED

BLK

BOX

WHT/ BLU

WHT/ BLU

BLK

)>

r»

BLU/WHT

tr

» »

aw.

—r

»i

)

-*l

>

*

>

BLU/YEL

(GX>

-e-

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (EXCEPT DX)

ABS INDICATOR CIRCUIT

SRS INDICATOR CIRCUIT

4 >

»5

•

-

l3

GAUGE ASSEMBLY

,

ABS

SRS UNIT

I

I

|

.MODULATOR CONTROL I

I

Warning systems

-

coupe/sedan

(1 of 2)

I

UNIT

"1

CRUISE

CONTROL UNIT

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

OR START

FUEL

TANK UNIT

r

pip-

FUEL

.

GAUGE

Ifuse

SENDING

,

Ifuse

FUSE/

r

j

BUS

UNIT

¥ioa

Vsa

(METER)

BRAKE LEVEL

SW

BUS (SEFMJ)

|

,

MULTIPLEX

RELAY BOX

control UN(T

F Ifuse

¥

_

12-67

UNDER .HOOD

H UNDER-

|

|DASH

FUSE/

RELAY

L

^_i

,FUSO J,

J RELAY

1QA

Jf

*k.

.*

TEST

TACHOMETER CONNECTOR

7 WASHER

FLUID

LEVEL SWITCH (CANADA)

X

-de-i-^v VSS (EXCEPT CVT)

ft DRL CONTROL

B

| o I O o o K

/

^J PARKING BRAKE swr rcH

r

T

I

I

Warning systems

-

coupe/sedan

uj

i i K K a o

(2 of 2)

"

? « i £ z g Ul £. | Z

5 9 o dD

2

12-68

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Warning systems

-

hatchback

(1 of 2)

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

OR START

12-69

UNDERDASH FUSE/RELAY BOX "I

UNDERDASH

I

1

?4

Ifuse ?10

>10A

Ifuse

?7,SA

BUS

BUS

BUS

(BRAKE)

(METER)

(ECU)

|

i

(METER)

J

FUSE/RELAY .BOX

MULTIPLEX

[

CONTROL

I*UNIT

' 1

I

,

' |

EPS

CONTROL UNIT

TEST

TACHOMETER CONNECTOR

—y US

UJ

l PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

Warning systems

o

Q-

-_

L

hatchback (2 of 2)

i

12-70

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Notes

GLOSSARY

GL-1

GLOSSARY AIR/FUEL RATIO: The ture

drawn

ratio of air-to-gasoline

by weight

in

the fuel mix-

two dissimilar types different

into the engine.

tion as

AIR INJECTION:

of the

exhaust ports of an engine. The fresh

it

can

of

to the

sensors usually func-

an on/off switch.

BLOWBY:

air

entering the hot exhaust manifold causes any remaining fuel to be burned

before

These types

of the alloys.

One method of reducing harmful exhaust emissions by

each

injecting air into

bend when heated or cooled due

of metal that

expansion rates

Combustion gases, composed

fuel, that leak

of water

engine operation. These gases are removed by the

exit the tailpipe.

vapor and unburned

past the piston rings into the crankcase during normal

PCV system

to prevent

the buildup of harmful acids in the crankcase.

ALTERNATOR: A

device used for converting mechanical energy into

BRAKE PAD: A

electrical energy.

AMMETER:

An

instrument, calibrated

flow of an electrical current

in

amperes, used to measure the

Ammeters

a circuit.

in

are always connected in

brake shoe and lining assembly used with disc brakes.

BRAKE SHOE:

The backing

brake lining. The term

for the

is,

however,

usually applied to the assembly of the brake backing and lining.

series with the circuit being tested.

BUSHING: A

AMPERE: electrical

The

rate of

pressure

is

flow of electrical current present

applied against one

ohm

when one

volt of

used

in

CALIPER: A Any microprocessor

gous)

make

its

usually removable, for a bearing; an anti-friction liner

of electrical resistance.

ANALOG COMPUTER: electrical signals to

liner,

place of a bearing.

that

uses similar (analo-

is

hydraulically activated device

mounted straddling

in

the brake rotor (disc).

a disc brake system, which

The

caliper contains at least

one piston and two brake pads. Hydraulic pressure on the piston(s) forces

calculations.

the pads against the rotor.

ARMATURE: A electrical

energy

in

a magnetic

in

a generator.

laminated, soft iron core wrapped by a wire that converts to

mechanical energy as

field,

it

caused by the weight is

a motor or

relay.

When

into electrical

rotated

energy as

CAMSHAFT: A

The pressure on the

of the air in the

14.7 psi at 32°F (101 kPa

at

level, this

one

at

CAPACITOR: A

Earth's surface

atmosphere. At sea

shaft in the engine

operate the valves. The camshaft

chain or gears,

ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE: sure

in

changes mechanical energy

be suspended

breaking

device which stores an electrical charge.

pres-

0°C).

down

CARBON MONOXIDE

of a liquid into a fine mist that

can

in

(CO): A colorless, odorless gas given

is

device, usually

engine, which mixes the

BACKFIRE: The sudden combustion system

of

gases

in

air

and

if

ade-

mounted on

fuel in the

the intake manifold of an

proper proportion to allow even

combustion.

the intake or exhaust

that results in a loud explosion.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER: A

BACKLASH: The

clearance or play between two parts, such as

meshed

gears.

BACKPRESSURE:

the exhaust system, like

means

of a heat-producing

chemical reaction.

CENTRIFUGAL ADVANCE: A

mechanical method

spark timing by using flyweights

in

of

advancing the

the distributor that react to centrifugal

force generated by the distributor shaft rotation.

heat resistant, plastic insulator material

commonly used

in

and transistorized components.

printed circuit boards

CHECK VALVE: BALL BEARING: A

or

bearing

between which hardened

made up

of

vacuum

in

Any one-way valve

one direction

installed to permit the flow of

fuel

hardened inner and outer races device, usually a

moveable

carburetor to restrict the flow of

BALLAST RESISTOR: A

resistor in the primary ignition circuit that low-

ers voltage after the engine

is

started to reduce

valve, placed in the intake path of a

air.

wear on ignition compo-

CIRCUIT: Any unbroken path through which an

nents.

flow.

friction reducing,

a stationary part and a

air,

only.

steel balls roll.

CHOKE: A

BEARING: A

in

Restrictions in the exhaust system that slow the exit

exhaust gases from the combustion chamber.

BAKELITE: A

device installed

a muffler, that converts harmful byproducts of combustion into carbon

dioxide and water vapor by

of

as a

off

poisonous and extremely dangerous

is

not available.

CARBURETOR: A

parallel to a shaft or bearing bore.

It

confined areas, building up slowly to toxic levels without warning

quate ventilation

in air.

AXIAL PLAY: Movement

belt,

half the crankshaft speed.

normal byproduct of combustion.

ATOMIZATION: The

on which are the lobes (cams) which driven by the crankshaft, via a

is

moving

supportive device usually located between

Also used to describe

CIRCUIT BREAKER: A

fuel flow in

some

electrical current

can

instances.

switch which protects an electrical circuit from over-

part.

load by opening the circuit level.

BIMETAL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: Any

sensor or switch made of

cally.

Some

circuit

when

the current flow exceeds a predetermined

breakers must be reset manually, while most reset automati-

GLOSSARY

GL-2

COIL (IGNITION): A

transformer

in

the ignition circuit which steps up

DIODE: An only.

COMBINATION MANIFOLD: An

DISC BRAKE: A

intake

and exhaust manifolds

in

assembly which includes both the

one casting.

rotor,

one direction

electrical device that will allow current to flow in

the voltage provided to the spark plugs.

hydraulic braking assembly consisting of a brake disc, or

mounted on an

axle,

and a caliper assembly containing, usually two

brake pads which are activated by hydraulic pressure. The pads are forced

COMBINATION VALVE: A

device used

some

in

atmosphere. The valve relieves

systems

of venting

vapors to a charcoal storage canister instead

fuel

fuel

that routes

them

into the

pressure and allows fresh

fuel tank

against the sides of the disc, creating friction which slows the vehicle.

air into

DISTRIBUTOR: A

mechanically driven device on an engine which

responsible for electrically firing the spark plug

the tank as the fuel level drops to prevent a vapor lock situation.

is

at

a predetermined point of

in

two

the piston stroke.

COMPRESSION

RATIO: The comparison

der and combustion

chamber with

volume

of the total

the piston at

BDC and

of the cylin-

the piston at

TDC.

DOWEL

A

PIN:

pin, inserted in

mating holes

different parts allow-

ing those parts to maintain a fixed relationship.

CONDENSER:

1

.

An

electrical

device which acts to store an electrical

charge, preventing voltage surges.

2.

A

tioning system in which refrigerant gas

radiator-like device in the air condi-

DRUM

condenses

one or two wheel cylinders, mounted on a

into a liquid, giving off

BRAKE: A

braking system which consists of two brake shoes and

drum, mounted on an

heat.

CONDUCTOR:

material through which an electrical current can be

Any

The

CONTINUITY: Continuous

Can be checked with an

or complete circuit.

COUNTERSHAFT: An

intermediate shaft which

in turn, that rotation to a

working

rotated by a mainshaft

is

degrees of shaft rotation,

at

which an

off.

ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU): Module

ELECTRONIC IGNITION: A spark plugs

part.

in

on and

amplifier or igniter. See

ohmmeter.

and a brake

fixed backing plate,

which revolves around the assembly.

measured

rate,

electrical circuit cycles

transmitted easily.

and transmits,

DWELL:

axle,

Ignition

module, module,

for definition.

system

in

which the timing and

firing of the

controlled by an electronic control unit, usually called a

is

module. These systems have no points or condenser.

CRANKCASE:

The lower

part of an engine in

which the crankshaft and

END-PLAY: The measured amount

related parts operate.

CRANKSHAFT:

The main driving shaft

an engine which receives reci-

of

procating motion from the pistons and converts

it

to rotary

ENGINE: A

In

an engine, the round hole

the engine block

in

in

a shaft.

device that converts heat into mechanical energy.

motion.

EXHAUST MANIFOLD: A CYLINDER:

movement

of axial

which the

in

set of cast

passages or pipes which conduct

exhaust gases from the engine.

piston(s) ride.

FEELER GAUGE: A

CYLINDER BLOCK: is

The main

structural

member

an engine

of

found the cylinders, crankshaft and other principal

in

which

blade, usually metal, of precisely predetermined

thickness, used to measure the clearance between two parts.

parts.

FIRING ORDER: The

CYLINDER HEAD:

The detachable portion

of the engine, usually fas-

tened to the top of the cylinder block and containing

combustion chambers. On overhead valve engines,

and

their operating parts.

On overhead cam

all

it

engines,

or

most

of

of the

order

an engine. Also the order

in

in

which combustion occurs

which spark

the cylinders

in

distributed to the plugs by

is

the distributor.

contains the valves it

contains the

FLOODING: The

camshaft as well.

presence of too

much

combustion chamber which prevents the

fuel in the intake air/fuel

manifold and

mixture from

firing,

thereby causing a no-start situation.

DEAD CENTER:

The extreme top or bottom

of the piston stroke.

FLYWHEEL: A DETONATION: An unwanted

explosion of the air/fuel mixture

in

the

com-

bustion chamber caused by excess heat and compression, advanced timing, or

an overly lean mixture. Also referred

DIAPHRAGM: A vacuum advance

thin, flexible wall

to

engages the

separating two cavities, such as

in

a

unit.

starting

initial

FOOT POUND or

is

work needed

(ft.

lbs. or

to raise

The

affixed the ring gear.

ring gear, turning the flywheel,

imparting the

as "ping".

disc shaped part bolted to the rear end of the crankshaft.

Around the outer perimeter

motion

which

starter drive

rotates the crankshaft,

to the engine.

sometimes,

ft.

lb.):

The amount

an item weighing one pound, a distance

of

energy

of

one

foot.

DIESELING: A

condition

cause the engine

to run

on

in

which hot spots

after the

key

is

the combustion

in

turned

chamber

FUSE: A

off.

protective device in a circuit

breaking the circuit

DIFFERENTIAL: A geared assembly which

allows the transmission of

motion between drive axles, giving one axle the the other.

ability to turn faster

than

when

a specific

which prevents

amperage

structed around a strip or wire of a lower is

designed to protect.

fuse

is

present

in

When

is

circuit

present.

amperage

overload by

The device

is

con-

rating than the circuit

an amperage higher than that stamped on the

the circuit, the strip or wire melts, opening the circuit.

it

GLOSSARY GEAR RATIO:

The

ratio

between the number of teeth on meshing gears.

OHMMETER: in

GENERATOR: A

an

An instrument used

for

GL-3

measuring the resistance,

in

ohms,

electrical circuit.

device which converts mechanical energy into electrical

OUTPUT SHAFT:

energy.

The shaft which transmits torque from a device, such

as a transmission.

HEAT RANGE: from

The measure

of a spark plug's ability to dissipate heat

end. The higher the heat range, the hotter the plug

firing

its

OVERDRIVE: A

fires.

gear assembly which produces more shaft revolutions

than that transmitted to

HUB: The

it.

center part of a wheel or gear.

OVERHEAD CAMSHAFT

HYDROCARBON carbon.

A

(HC): Any chemical

compound made up

hydrogen and

of

major pollutant formed by the engine as a byproduct of combustion.

HYDROMETER: An

instrument used to measure the specific gravity of a

camshaft

(OHC): An engine

mounted on top

is

either directly or

by means

OVERHEAD VALVE

of rocker

configuration

in

which the

arms.

(OHV): An engine configuration

the valves are located

in

head and operates the valve

of the cylinder

in

which

the cylinder head and the camshaft

is

all

of

located in

solution.

the cylinder block.

The camshaft operates the valves

via lifters

and

pushrods.

INCH POUND

(inch lbs.;

sometimes

in. lb.

or in. lbs.): One twelfth

pound.

of a foot

OXIDES OF NITROGEN (NOx): duced as a byproduct

INDUCTION: A means magnetic

of transferring electrical

energy

in

the form of a

Chemical compounds

to

produce smog.

Principle used in the ignition coil to increase voltage.

field.

OXYGEN SENSOR:

Use with the feedback system

INJECTOR: A

device which receives metered fuel under relatively low

of

pressure and

activated to inject the fuel into the engine under relatively

the voltage signal to an air/fuel ratio.

is

high pressure

of nitrogen pro-

combustion. They combine with hydrocarbons

of

at

oxygen

in

to

sense the presence

computer which can reference

the exhaust gas and signal the

a predetermined time.

PINION: The smaller

INPUT SHAFT: The

shaft to

which torque

is

of

two meshing gears.

applied, usually carrying the

driving gear or gears.

PISTON RING: An open-ended diameter of the piston.

INTAKE MANIFOLD: A

casting of passages or pipes used to conduct air

or a fuel/air mixture to the cylinders.

JOURNAL:

Its

shaft operates.

PRELOAD: A

is

fits

to

into a

groove on the outer

form a seal between the pis-

Most automotive pistons have

ton and cylinder wall.

compression sealing; one

The bearing surface within which a

ring with

chief function

three rings: two for

for oil sealing.

predetermined load placed on a bearing during assembly or

by adjustment.

KEY: A small block usually

fitted in

a notch between a shaft and a

hub

to

prevent slippage of the two parts.

PRIMARY

CIRCUIT:

the low voltage side of the ignition system which

consists of the ignition switch, ballast resistor or resistance wire, bypass,

MANIFOLD: A

casting of passages or set of pipes which connect the

MANIFOLD VACUUM: Low formed

just

below the

pressure

throttle plates.

in

hydraulic system.

In

clutch systems and

The primary

automotive use, is

electronic control unit

PRESS

an engine intake manifold

Manifold vacuum

is

highest at idle

and pick-up

coil

as well as the connecting wires

FIT:

The mating

fluid pressurizing it

is

found

in

device

in

RACE: The

a

brake and hydraulic

pedal activated, either directly

or, in

a

of

two parts under pressure, due

to the inner

diameter of one being smaller than the outer diameter of the other, or vice versa; an interference

and drops under acceleration.

MASTER CYLINDER:

coil,

and harnesses.

cylinders to an inlet or outlet source.

balls,

fit.

surface on the inner or outer ring of a bearing on which the

needles or rollers move.

power brake

system, through the power booster.

REGULATOR: A

device which maintains the amperage and/or voltage lev-

els of a circuit at predetermined values.

MODULE:

Electronic control unit, amplifier or igniter of solid state or

integrated design which controls the current flow in the ignition primary circuit

based on input from the pick-up

primary

circuit,

high secondary voltage

coil. is

When

induced

the in

module opens

RELAY: A

switch which automatically opens and/or closes a

the coil.

RESISTANCE: The electrical device,

NEEDLE BEARING: A large

number)

bearing which consists of a

(usually a

in

opposition to the flow of current through a circuit or is

measured

in

ohms. Resistance

is

equal to the volt-

age divided by the amperage.

RESISTOR: A

(Q) The unit used to measure the resistance flow. One ohm is the amount of resistance that

one ampere

number

and

of long, thin rollers.

OHM: trical

circuit.

the

a circuit with one volt of pressure.

of conductor-to-elecof resistance in

limits current flow to

device, usually

an

made

electrical circuit.

of wire,

which

offers a preset

amount

GLOSSARY

GL-4

RING GEAR: The name

given to a ring-shaped gear attached to a differ-

ential case, or affixed to a flywheel or

ROLLER BEARING: A

bearing

as part of a planetary gear

made up

of

TOP DEAD CENTER

hardened inner and outer

races between which hardened steel rollers move.

ROTOR:

1.

The disc-shaped

top of

part of a disc brake assembly,

which passes current

upon which

travel

its

TORQUE:

cap tower

to the distributor

member voltage side of the ignition system,

of the

member

to a driven

drive ratio

CIRCUIT: The high

The twisting force applied

TORQUE CONVERTER: A turbine

contacts.

SECONDARY

(TDC): The point

which the piston reaches the

at

on the compression stroke.

an object.

to

mounted atop

the brake pads bear; also called, brake disc. 2. The device the distributor shaft,

heating, controlling the temperature of the coolant and rate of coolant flow.

set.

and torque.

In

used

to transmit

power from a driving

via hydraulic action, providing

automotive use,

it

changes

in

links the driveplate at the rear

engine to the automatic transmission.

usually above 20,000 volts. The secondary includes the ignition coil, coil

cap and

wire, distributor

SENDING

rotor,

spark plug wires and spark plugs.

UNIT: A mechanical,

electrical, hydraulic or

TRANSDUCER: A

electro-magnetic

device which transmits information to a gauge.

SENSOR: Any designed

may

to

and temperatures. Usually electronic

send a voltage signal

to

age signal

in

an on-board computer,

nature and

TUNE-UP: A

may

some sensors

provide a variable volt-

regular maintenance function, usually associated with the

replacement and adjustment of parts and components fuel

operate as a simple on/off switch or they

semi-conductor component which can be actuated by a

small voltage to perform an electrical switching function.

device designed to measure engine operating conditions

or ambient pressures

TRANSISTOR: A

device used to change a force into an electrical signal.

systems

of a vehicle for the

purpose

of attaining

in

the electrical and

optimum

perfor-

mance.

a potentiometer) as conditions or measured parameters

(like

change.

TURBOCHARGER: and forces

SHIM: Spacers

predetermined thickness used between parts to

of precise,

establish a proper working relationship.

SLAVE CYLINDER: system which

is

SOLENOID: A is

to

In

automotive use, a device

used

to

in

the hydraulic clutch

produce a magnetic

field,

the effect of

which

ignition engine.

device screwed into the combustion chamber of a spark

ceramic insulator, mounted

in

is

a conductive core inside of a

driven

pump which compresses at

to increased

VACUUM GAUGE: in

intake air

higher than atmospheric

more

fuel to

be burned and

horsepower being produced.

VACUUM ADVANCE:

uum

The basic construction

An exhaust

combustion chambers

pressures. The increased air pressure allows

response

produce work.

SPARK PLUG: A

into the

results in increased

activated by hydraulic force, disengaging the clutch.

coil

it

A

device which advances the ignition timing

in

engine vacuum.

An instrument used

to

measure the presence

of vac-

a chamber.

VALVE: A

device which control the pressure, direction of flow or rate of

flow of a liquid or gas.

an outer conductive base. An electrical

charge from the spark plug wire travels along the conductive core and

jumps a preset

air

gap

to

a grounding point or points

at the

ductive base. The resultant spark ignites the fuel/air mixture

end in

of the

the

con-

com-

VALVE CLEARANCE: The measured gap

between the end

stem and the rocker arm, cam lobe or follower

of the valve

that activates the valve.

bustion chamber.

VISCOSITY: The

SPLINES: Ridges machined

rating of a liquid's internal resistance to flow.

or cast onto the outer diameter of a shaft or

inner diameter of a bore to enable parts to mate without rotation.

VOLTMETER: An

instrument used for measuring electrical force

in units

called volts. Voltmeters are always connected parallel with the circuit being

TACHOMETER: A

device used to measure the rotary speed of an engine,

shaft, gear, etc., usually in rotations per

tested.

minute.

WHEEL CYLINDER: THERMOSTAT: A which

is

valve, located in the cooling

closed when cold and opens gradually

system in

of

an engine,

response to engine

Found

in

the automotive

drum brake assembly,

it

a device, actuated by hydraulic pressure, which, through internal pistons,

pushes the brake shoes outward against the drums.

is

ABOUT THIS MANUAL, 0-5 ACCELERATOR CABLE, REMOVAL, INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT, ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS, 0-4

4-14

AIR CONDITIONING and heating system, check and maintenance, 3-16 compressor, removal and

installation,

3-19

condenser, removal and installation, 3-21 pressure switch, replacement, 3-21

removal and

receiver-drier,

installation,

3-20

AIR FILTER housing, removal and installation, 4-13 replacement, 1-20

AIRBAG SYSTEM, GENERAL INFORMATION, 12-28 ALTERNATOR, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION. 5-8 ANTENNA, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 12-16 ANTIFREEZE, GENERAL INFORMATION, 3-4 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS), GENERAL INFORMATION, 9-2

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLES, 7B-1 THROUGH 7B-10 automatic transaxle and Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT), removal and installation, 7B-7 diagnosis, general, 7B-2 driveaxle

oil

seals, replacement,

7A-2

fluid

change, 1-30 level

check, 1-8

interlock system, description

and solenoid replacement, 7B-6

overhaul, general information, 7B-9 shift

cable, replacement lever,

and adjustment, 7B-3

replacement, 7B-5

Transmission range switch, replacement and adjustment, 6-16

AUTOMOTIVE CHEMICALS AND LUBRICANTS, 0-19

B BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH, CHECK AND REPLACEMENT, 7A-3 BALANCE SHAFT ASSEMBLY AND BALANCE SHAFTS, DOHC ENGINES, REMOVAL, INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION, 2B-11

BATTERY cables, check and replacement, 5-4

check and replacement, 5-3 check, maintenance and charging, 1-13

disconnection, 5-2

BLOWER MOTOR POWER TRANSISTOR AND BLOWER MOTOR, REPLACEMENT, 3-12 BODY REPAIR major damage, 11-6

minor damage, 11-2

BODY, 11-1

THROUGH

11-28

BODY, MAINTENANCE, 11-2

BOOSTER BATTERY (JUMP) STARTING, 0-16 BRAKES,

9-1

Anti-lock Brake caliper,

THROUGH

9-20

System (ABS), general information, 9-2

removal and

disc, inspection,

installation,

removal and

9-6

installation,

9-7

2

MASTER INDEX

IND-2

COMPRESSOR, AIR CONDITIONING, REMOVAL AND

fluid

INSTALLATION, 3-19

change, 1-24 level

CONDENSER, AIR CONDITIONING, REMOVAL AND

check, 1-8

INSTALLATION, 3-21

general information, 9-2

hoses and

lines, inspection

CONTROL ARM (FRONT), REMOVAL AND

and replacement, 9-15

INSTALLATION, 10-6

hydraulic system, bleeding, 9-15 light switch,

CONVERSION FACTORS, 0-17 COOLANT

replacement, 9-19

master cylinder, removal and

installation,

9-13

pads, replacement, 9-3

level check,

parking brake

reservoir,

adjustment, 9-18

temperature sending

9-19 installation,

9-16

servicing (draining, flushing and

THROUGH 3-22 COWL COVER, REMOVAL AND

system check, 1-16 wheel cylinder, removal and

1-24

refilling),

COOLING, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS,

brake, replacement, 9-9

drum

3-9

check and replacement, 3-11

check, 1-15

power booster, removal and shoes,

installation,

unit,

COOLING SYSTEM

shoes, replacement, 9-9 pedal, adjustment,

1-7

removal and

installation,

9-13

BULB REPLACEMENT, BUMPER COVERS, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 11-8 BUYING PARTS, 0-7 12-21

3-1

INSTALLATION, 11-25

CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR, REPLACEMENT, 6-9 CRANKSHAFT PULLEY AND FRONT OIL SEAL,

REPLACEMENT DOHC engines, 2B-6 SOHC engines, 2A-11 CRANKSHAFT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 2C-16 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM, GENERAL INFORMATION, 12-26 CYLINDER COMPRESSION CHECK, 2C-4 CYLINDER HEAD, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION DOHC engines, 2B-9 SOHC engines, 2A-14

CABLE REPLACEMENT accelerator, battery,

fuel door,

hood

4-14

5-4

11-13

release,

11-8

trunk release, 11-13

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 9-6 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR, REPLACEMENT, 6-9 CAMSHAFT, REMOVAL, INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION CALIPER, DISC BRAKE,

DOHC engines, SOHC engines,

2B-7

DASHBOARD SWITCHES, REPLACEMENT, 12-9 DASHBOARD TRIM PANELS, REMOVAL AND

2A-1

CAPACITIES, 1-31

CATALYTIC CONVERTER, GENERAL DESCRIPTION, CHECK

AND REPLACEMENT, 6-21 CENTER CONSOLE, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 11-19 CHARGING SYSTEM check, 5-7

INSTALLATION, 11-21

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL), GENERAL INFORMATION, 12-27 DEFOGGER, REAR WINDOW, CHECK AND REPAIR, 12-16 DIAGNOSIS, 0-21

DIFFERENTIAL (4WD CR-V MODELS)

general information and precautions, 5-7

CHASSIS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, 12-1 THROUGH 12-70 CHEMICALS AND LUBRICANTS, 0-19 CIRCUIT BREAKERS, GENERAL INFORMATION, 12-5

fluid level check,

oil

CLUTCH

seals, replacement,

removal and

components, removal, inspection and

installation,

8-3

1-9

change, 1-26

8-13

installation,

8-15

DISC BRAKE

description and check, 8-2 caliper,

removal and

installation,

9-6

hydraulic system, bleeding, 8-3 disc, inspection, removal

master cylinder, removal and installation, 8-2 pedal adjustment, 8-6 release bearing and lever, removal, inspection and installation, 8-5

and

installation,

9-7

pads, replacement, 9-3

parking brake shoes, 9-9

DOHC ENGINES,

2B-1

THROUGH

2B-14

release cylinder, removal and installation, 8-3

balance shaft assembly and balance shafts, removal, inspection and start switch,

check and replacement, 8-6

CLUTCH AND DRIVEUNE, 8-1 THROUGH 8-16 COILS, IGNITION, REPLACEMENT, 5-6

installation,

2B-11

camshaft, removal, inspection and installation, 2B-7 crankshaft pulley and front

oil seal,

removal and

installation,

2B-6

MASTER INDEX cylinder head, removal and installation,

engine front cover, removal and

2B-9

installation,

cylinder compression check,

2B-4

engine mounts, check and replacement, 2B-12

and

intake manifold, removal

and

installation,

installation,

disassembly sequence, 2C-10

oil

pan, removal and installation,

reassembly sequence, 2C-19

2B-3

engine rebuilding alternatives, 2C-6 engine removal, methods and precautions, 2C-7

2B-10

pump, removal, inspection and

installation,

engine, removal and installation,

2B-10

initial

rear

main

oil seal,

replacement, 2B-12 oil

repair operations possible with the engine in the vehicle,

rocker

arm assembly, removal, inspection and

2B-2

2B-7

installation,

timing chain and sprockets, removal, inspection and installation, 2B-5

Top Dead Center (TDC)

for

number one

2C-2

general information,

2B-12

i-VTEC system, description and component checks, 2B-6 oil

2C-4

engine overhaul

exhaust manifolds, removal and installation, 2B-4 flywheel/driveplate, removal

IND-3

piston, locating,

2B-2

start-up

2C-8

after overhaul,

2C-19

pressure check, 2C-4

pistons and connecting rods, removal and installation,

2C-10

vacuum gauge diagnostic checks, 2C-5

ENGINE, IN-VEHICLE REPAIR

DOHC

valve cover, removal and installation, 2B-2

and break-in

PROCEDURES

engines, 2B-1 through 2B-14

balance shaft assembly and balance shafts, removal, inspection

DOOR latch, lock cylinder

and handles, removal and

installation,

and

installation,

glass regulator, removal and installation, 11-18

window

glass, removal

installation,

oil seal,

removal and

cylinder head, removal and installation,

engine front cover, removal and

11-18

DOUBLE OVERHEAD CAMSHAFT (DOHC) ENGINES,

THROUGH

2B-11

crankshaft pulley and front

11-14

window

and

installation,

camshaft, removal, inspection and installation, 2B-7

removal, installation and adjustment, 11-16 trim panels, removal

and

11-17

2B-1

installation,

2B-6

2B-9

installation,

2B-4

engine mounts, check and replacement, 2B-12 exhaust manifolds, removal and installation, 2B-4

2B-14

flywheel/driveplate, removal and installation,

DRIVEAXLE(S)

intake manifold, removal

and

installation,

2B-12

2B-3

boot

i-VTEC system, description and component checks, 2B-6

check, 1-18

replacement, 8-9 oil

seals, replacement,

removal and

2B-10

oil

pan, removal and installation,

oil

pump, removal, inspection and

2B-10

installation,

7A-2

installation,

rear

8-7

main

oil seal,

replacement, 2B-12

repair operations possible with the engine in the vehicle,

DRIVEBELT CHECK, ADJUSTMENT AND

REPLACEMENT, 1-22 DRIVESHAFT (4WD CR-V MODELS), CHECK, REMOVAL AND

rocker

arm assembly, removal, inspection and

2B-7

timing chain and sprockets, removal, inspection and installation,

INSTALLATION, 8-12

2B-5

Top Dead Center (TDC)

DRUM BRAKE

2B-2

installation,

for

number one

piston, locating,

2B-2

valve cover, removal and installation, 2B-2

shoes, replacement, 9-9

wheel cylinder, removal and

installation,

SOHC

9-13

engines, 2A-1 through 2A-22

camshaft, removal, inspection and installation, 2A-12 crankshaft pulley and front

oil seal,

replacement, 2A-11

cylinder head, removal and installation,

2A-14

engine mounts, check and replacement, 2A-18 exhaust manifold, removal and installation, 2A-5

ELECTRIC SIDE VIEW MIRRORS, GENERAL INFORMATION, 12-26

flywheel/driveplate, removal intake manifold, removal

ELECTRICAL LOAD DETECTOR (ELD) UNIT, REPLACEMENT, 6-10 ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING, GENERAL INFORMATION, 12-2

EMISSIONS AND ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS,

THROUGH

pan, removal and installation,

oil

pump, removal, inspection and

rear

main

2C-16

2A-15 installation,

2A-16

replacement, 2A-18

repair operations possible with the engine in the vehicle,

ENGINE, GENERAL OVERHAUL PROCEDURES, 2C-1 THROUGH 2C-22 installation,

oil seal,

2A-18

2A-4

2A-2

6-1

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR, REPLACEMENT, 6-11 ENGINE COOLING FANS AND SWITCH, CHECK AND REPLACEMENT, 3-6 ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, 5-1 THROUGH 5-12

and

installation,

installation,

oil

rocker

6-30

crankshaft, removal

and

and

arm assembly, removal, inspection and

installation,

2A-7

timing belt and sprockets, removal, inspection and installation,

2A-9

Top Dead Center (TDC)

for

number one

piston, locating,

valve cover, removal and installation, 2A-3

VTEC

system, description and component checks, 2A-6

ENGINE MOUNTS, CHECK AND REPLACEMENT DOHC engines, 2B-12 SOHC engines, 2A-18

2A-2

MASTER INDEX

IND-4 ENGINE OIL and

oil filter

level

general information, 4-2

change, 1-11

lines

and

general information, 4-5

fittings,

pressure regulator, replacement, 4-9

check, 1-6

ENGINE OVERHAUL

pressure

disassembly sequence, 2C-10

Programmed

relief

procedure, 4-2

Fuel Injection (PGM-FI) system

general information, 4-16

general information, 2C-2

reassembly sequence, 2C-19

Programmed

ENGINE REBUILDING ALTERNATIVES, 2C-6 ENGINE REMOVAL, METHODS AND PRECAUTIONS, 2C-7

pulsation damper, removal and installation, 4-19

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 2C-8 EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS CONTROL (EVAP) SYSTEM, GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND COMPONENT

pump/fuel gauge sending unit module, removal and

REPLACEMENT, 6-22 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM, GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND COMPONENT REPLACEMENT, 6-25 EXHAUST MANIFOLD, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION DOHC engines, 2B-4 SOHC engines, 2A-5 EXHAUST SYSTEM

system check, 1-21

ENGINE,

pump/fuel

Fuel Injection (PGM-FI) system, check, 4-17

filter/fuel

gauge sending

unit

module, replacement, 4-10 installation,

4-7

pump/fuel pressure, check, 4-4

and

rail

injectors,

removal and

4-20

installation,

tank cleaning and

removal and throttle body,

repair,

general information, 4-12

installation,

removal and

4-12

installation,

4-18

FUSES, GENERAL INFORMATION, 12-4

check, 1-22 servicing, general information, 4-21

GENERAL ENGINE OVERHAUL PROCEDURES,

THROUGH

crankshaft, removal

FANS AND SWITCH, ENGINE COOLING, CHECK AND REPLACEMENT, 3-6 FAULT FINDING, 0-21 FENDER, FRONT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 11-10 FILTER

and

installation,

cylinder compression check,

2C-16

2C-4

engine overhaul

disassembly sequence, 2C-10 general information,

2C-2

reassembly sequence, 2C-19

REPLACEMENT

engine

air,

1-20

engine rebuilding alternatives, 2C-6

engine

oil,

1-11

engine removal, methods and precautions, 2C-7

fuel,

engine, removal and installation,

4-8

initial

1-21

interior ventilation,

oil

FLUID LEVEL CHECKS, 1-6

2C-10

2C-5

H

1-6

manual transaxle, 1-9

power steering

fluid,

windshield washer

HAZARD FLASHER AND TURN SIGNAL RELAY, CHECK AND

1-8

fluid,

REPLACEMENT, 12-6 HEADLIGHT

1-7

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

adjustment, 12-19

capacities, 1-31

bulb, replacement,

recommended, 1-31

DOHC engines, 2B-12 SOHC engines, 2A-18 FRACTION/DECIMAL/MILLIMETER EQUIVALENTS, 0-18 FUEL AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS, 4-1 THROUGH 4-22 accelerator cable, removal, installation

12-18

housing, replacement, 12-2

FLYWHEEL/DRIVEPLATE, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

air filter

diagnostic checks,

(4WDCR-V), 1-9

engine coolant, 1-7 oil,

2C-19

pressure check, 2C-4

vacuum gauge

brake, 1-8

engine

2C-8

start-up and break-in after overhaul,

pistons and connecting rods, removal and installation,

automatic transaxle, 1-8

differential

2C-1

2C-22

and adjustment, 4-14

housing, removal and installation, 4-13

exhaust system check, 1-22 servicing, general information, 4-21

HEATER CORE, REPLACEMENT, 3-14 HEATER/AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL ASSEMBLY,

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 3-13 HEATING SYSTEM, CHECK AND MAINTENANCE, HINGES AND LOCKS, MAINTENANCE, 11-6 HOOD

3-16

release latch and cable, removal and installation, 11-8

removal, installation and adjustment, 11-7

HORN, REPLACEMENT, 12-20 HOSES, UNDERHOOD, CHECK AND REPLACEMENT, 1-19

MASTER INDEX HUB AND BEARING ASSEMBLY, REPLACEMENT 10-7

front, rear,

10-10

IND-5

LUBRICANTS AND CHEMICALS, 0-19 LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS capacities, 1-31

recommended, 1-31

I

CONTROL IGNITION SYSTEM IDLE AIR

(IAC) VALVE,

REPLACEMENT, 6-20

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE, 1-4 MAINTENANCE TECHNIQUES, TOOLS AND WORKING

check, 5-6 coils,

replacement, 5-6

FACILITIES, 0-7

general information, 5-5

switch and key lock cylinder, replacement, 12-8

START-UP AND BREAK-IN AFTER OVERHAUL, 2C-19 INJECTORS, FUEL, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 4-20 INITIAL

INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR,

REPLACEMENT, 6-12 INSTRUMENT cluster,

removal and

M MAINTENANCE, ROUTINE, 1-1 THROUGH 1-32 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR, REPLACEMENT, 6-14 MANUAL TRANSAXLE, 7A-1 THROUGH 7A-4 back-up

oil

check and replacement, 7A-3

seals, replacement,

7A-2

fluid

installation,

12-12

panel, removal and installation,

11-23

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE

(IAT)

change, 1-30 level

SENSOR,

REPLACEMENT, 6-13

RUNNER CONTROL (IMRC) SYSTEM, DESCRIPTION AND COMPONENT REPLACEMENT, 6-20 INTAKE MANIFOLD, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION INTAKE MANIFOLD

DOHC engines, 2B-3 SOHC engines, 2A-4

check, 1-9

mount, check and replacement, 7A-2 overhaul, general information, 7A-4

removal and

installation,

7A-3

shift cables,

removal and

installation,

7A-3

MASTER CYLINDER, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION brake,

9-13

clutch, 8-2

INTERIOR VENTILATION FILTER REPLACEMENT, 1-21

INTERLOCK SYSTEM, AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE, DESCRIPTION AND SOLENOID REPLACEMENT, 7B-6 INTRODUCTION TO THE HONDA CIVIC AND CR-V, 0-5 l-VTEC SYSTEM, DOHC ENGINES, DESCRIPTION AND COMPONENT CHECKS, 2B-6

MIRRORS, ELECTRIC SIDE VIEW, GENERAL INFORMATION, 12-26 MIRRORS (REAR VIEW), REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 11-18

OIL

JACKING AND TOWING, 0-15

JUMP STARTING,

light switch,

driveaxle

0-16

KEY LOCK CYLINDER, IGNITION, REPLACEMENT, 12-8 KNOCK SENSOR, REPLACEMENT, 6-13

LIFTGATE (HATCHBACK MODELS), REMOVAL, INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT, 11-11

AND

OIL PAN,

CHANGE, ENGINE, 1-11

OIL FILTER

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

DOHC engines, 2B-10 SOHC engines, 2A-15 OIL PRESSURE CHECK, 2C-4 OIL PUMP, REMOVAL, INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION DOHC engines, 2B-10 SOHC engines, 2A-16 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM AND TROUBLE CODES, 6-2 OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR, REPLACEMENT, 6-14 OWNER'S MANUAL AND VECI LABEL INFORMATION, 1-5 OXYGEN SENSORS, REPLACEMENT, 6-14

LIFTGATE HANDLE, LATCH AND LOCK CYLINDER

(HATCHBACK MODELS), REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 11-11

LOCK CYLINDER, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION door,

(hatchback models), 11-11

tailgate latch

trunk

PADS, DISC BRAKE, REPLACEMENT, 9-3

11-17

liftgate

lid

(CR-V models), 11-26

(coupe and sedan models), 11-12

PARKING BRAKE adjustment, 9-18

shoes, replacement, 9-9

IND-6

MASTER INDEX ROTOR, BRAKE, INSPECTION, REMOVAL AND

PARTS, REPLACEMENT, BUYING, 0-7

INSTALLATION, 9-7

PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS, REMOVAL AND

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE,

INSTALLATION, 2C-10

THROUGH

1-1

1-32

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) SYSTEM, GENERAL DESCRIPTION, CHECK AND COMPONENT

REPLACEMENT, 6-26

POWER BRAKE BOOSTER, REMOVAL AND

SAFETY FIRST!, 0-20 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE, SEAT BELT CHECK, 1-16

INSTALLATION, 9-16

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM, GENERAL INFORMATION, 12-27

SEATS,

POWER STEERING fluid level check,

1-8

installation,

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION,

1-32

11-25

automatic transaxle, 7B-3

manual

10-16

transaxle,

7A-3

SHIFT LEVER, AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE,

system, bleeding, 10-16

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM, GENERAL INFORMATION, 12-26 POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM), REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 6-18

REPLACEMENT, 7B-5

SHOCK ABSORBER/COIL SPRING ASSEMBLY (REAR), REMOVAL, COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND INSTALLATION, 10-7

PRESSURE SWITCH, AIR CONDITIONING, REPLACEMENT, 3-21

PROGRAMMED

THROUGH

SHIFT CABLE, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch, replacement, 6-16

pump, removal and

1-1

SOHC ENGINES,

THROUGH

2A-1

2A-22

camshaft, removal, inspection and installation, 2A-12

FUEL INJECTION (PGM-FI) SYSTEM

crankshaft pulley and front

check, 4-17

oil seal,

replacement, 2A-11

cylinder head, removal and installation,

general information, 4-16

2A-14

engine mounts, check and replacement, 2A-18 exhaust manifold, removal and installation, 2A-5 flywheel/driveplate, removal and installation, intake manifold, removal

RADIATOR GRILLE, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 11-26 RADIATOR, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 3-9 RADIO AND SPEAKERS, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 12-14

installation,

oil

pan, removal and installation, 2A-15

oil

pump, removal, inspection and main

rear

oil seal,

2A-18

2A-4

installation,

2A-16

replacement, 2A-18

repair operations possible with the engine in the vehicle,

REAR DIFFERENTIAL LUBRICANT CHANGE (CR-V), 1-26 REAR HATCH GLASS AND SUPPORT STRUTS (CR-V MODELS), REMOVAL, INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT, 11-27 REAR MAIN OIL SEAL, REPLACEMENT DOHC engines, 2B-12 SOHC engines, 2A-18 REAR SHELF TRIM PANEL, REMOVAL AND

rocker

arm assembly, removal, inspection and

2A-2

installation,

Top Dead Center (TDC)

for

number one

piston, locating,

2A-2

valve cover, removal and installation, 2A-3

VTEC

system, description and component checks, 2A-6

SPARK PLUG torque specification, 1-32 type and gap, 1-32

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER, CHECK AND REPAIR, 12-16 REARVIEW MIRRORS, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 11-18 RECEIVER-DRIER, AIR CONDITIONING, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 3-20

SPEAKERS, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 12-14 STABILIZER BAR AND BUSHINGS, REMOVAL, INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION front,

12-5 IN

10-3

10-11

rear,

REPAIR OPERATIONS POSSIBLE WITH THE ENGINE THE VEHICLE

STARTER MOTOR and

circuit,

check, 5-10

removal and

installation,

5-11

DOHC engines, 2B-2 SOHC engines, 2A-2

STARTING SYSTEM, GENERAL INFORMATION AND PRECAUTIONS, 5-9

REPLACEMENT PARTS, BUYING, 0-7 ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY, REMOVAL, INSPECTION AND

column covers, removal and

INSTALLATION

DOHC engines, 2B-7 SOHC engines, 2A-7

2A-7

timing belt and sprockets, removal, inspection and installation, 2A-9

check and replacement, 1-28

INSTALLATION, 11-28

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 1-31 RELAYS, GENERAL INFORMATION AND TESTING,

and

STEERING installation,

column switches, replacement, 12-7 column, removal and gear,

removal and

installation,

installation,

10-13

10-14

11-23

MASTER INDEX knuckle and hub, removal and installation, 10-7 wheel, removal and installation,

10-11

STEERING, SUSPENSION AND DRIVEAXLE BOOT CHECK, 1-18 STRUT ASSEMBLY (FRONT), REMOVAL, INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION, 10-4

STRUT/SPRING ASSEMBLY, REPLACEMENT, 10-5 SUBFRAME, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 10-16 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS), GENERAL INFORMATION, 12-28 SUSPENSION AND STEERING SYSTEMS, 10-1

THROUGH

IND-7

overhaul, general information, 7B-9 shift

cable, replacement

and adjustment, 7B-3

replacement, 7B-5

lever,

Transmission range switch, replacement and adjustment, 6-16

TRANSAXLE, MANUAL, 7A-1 THROUGH 7A-4 back-up

light switch,

driveaxle

oil

check and replacement, 7A-3

seals, replacement,

7A-2

fluid

change, 1-30 level

check, 1-9

mount, check and replacement, 7A-2

10-20

SUSPENSION ARMS (REAR), REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 10-8

overhaul, general information, 7A-4

removal and

installation,

7A-3

shift cables,

removal and

installation,

7A-3

TRANSAXLE MOUNT, CHECK AND REPLACEMENT, 7A-2 TRANSFER CASE (4WD CR-V MODELS), REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 8-15

TAILGATE AND ASSIST STRUT (CR-V MODELS), REMOVAL, INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT, 11-27 TAILGATE LATCH, LOCK CYLINDER AND HANDLE (CR-V MODELS), REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 11-26

THERMOSTAT, CHECK AND REPLACEMENT, 3-4 THROTTLE BODY, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 4-18 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR, REPLACEMENT, 6-16 TIE-ROD ENDS, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 10-13

TIMING BELT AND SPROCKETS, SOHC ENGINES, REMOVAL, INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION, 2A-9 TIMING CHAIN AND SPROCKETS, DOHC ENGINES, REMOVAL, INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION, 2B-5 TIRE

AND

TIRE

PRESSURE CHECKS, 1-10

TIRE ROTATION, 1-16

TOOLS AND WORKING FACILITIES, 0-7 TOP DEAD CENTER (TDC) FOR NUMBER ONE PISTON, LOCATING DOHC engines, 2B-2 SOHC engines, 2A-2

TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH, REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT, 6-16 TROUBLE CODES, 6-2 TROUBLESHOOTING, 0-21 TRUNK LID (COUPE AND SEDAN MODELS), REMOVAL, INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT, 11-12 TRUNK LID LATCH, LOCK CYLINDER AND SUPPORT STRUTS (COUPE AND SEDAN MODELS), REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 11-12

TRUNK RELEASE AND FUEL DOOR CABLES, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 11-13

TUNE-UP AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE, 1-1 THROUGH 1-32 TUNE-UP, GENERAL INFORMATION, 1-5 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD FLASHER RELAY, CHECK AND REPLACEMENT, 12-6

U

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS brake caliper mounting bolts, 9-20

UNDERHOOD HOSE CHECK AND REPLACEMENT, 1-19 UPHOLSTERY AND CARPETS, MAINTENANCE, 11-2

cylinder head bolts

DOHC engines, 2B-14 SOHC engines, 2A-22

V

sparkplugs, 1-32

wheel lug nuts, 1-32 Other torque specifications can be found in the Chapter that deals with the

component being

serviced.

TOWING, TRANSAXLES, AUTOMATIC, 7B-1 THROUGH 7B-10 0-15

automatic transaxle and Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT),

removal and

installation,

7B-7

oil

seals, replacement,

7A-2

fluid

change, 1-30 level

check, 1-8

interlock system, description

1-26

DOHC engines, 2B-2 SOHC engines, 2A-3 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS, 0-6 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS), REPLACEMENT, 6-18 VINYL TRIM, MAINTENANCE, 11-2

diagnosis, general, 7B-2 driveaxle

VACUUM GAUGE DIAGNOSTIC CHECKS, 2C-5 VALVE CLEARANCE CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT, VALVE COVER, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

and solenoid replacement, 7B-6

VTEC SYSTEM, DESCRIPTION AND COMPONENT CHECKS DOHC engines, 2B-6 SOHC engines, 2A-6 VTEC SYSTEM, DESCRIPTION AND COMPONENT REPLACEMENT, 6-27

3

IND-8

MASTER INDEX

W

WINDSHIELD

WATER PUMP

was h er

check, 3-1

replacement, 3-11

and

fixed glass, replacement, fluid level check,

11-6

1-7

W jp er blade inspection and replacement, 1 -1 W PER MOT OR, CHECK AND REPLACEMENT, 12-12 WmmG DIAGRAMS, GENERAL INFORMATION, 12-29 |

WHEEL ALIGNMENT, GENERAL INFORMATION, 10-18 WHEEL CYLINDER, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, 9-13 WHEELS AND TIRES, GENERAL INFORMATION, 10-17

WORKING

FACILITIES 0-7

1™ 1

pi